JP2019107213A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To secure fairness of a game by achieving a stable winning rate.SOLUTION: A game machine including a ball put-out device 75 for putting out a game ball based on establishment of a prescribed condition, further includes exhaust heat supply means (a duct 450) for supplying exhaust heat to a put-out standby passage (a passage formed by a storage tank 72, a passage formed by a chute 73, and a passage formed by a curved channel device 74) where a game ball guided to the ball put-out device 75 stands by.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a ball payout device for paying out gaming balls based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a ball payout device for paying out balls and a rental ball are paid out by receiving a ball lending request signal from the outside, and a prize ball is paid out by receiving a prize ball payout signal by winning. A ball storage controller (upper tray) for receiving and storing the balls dispensed from the ball dispenser and controlling the dispensing of balls of the ball dispenser; There is known a gaming machine provided with a club unit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-167400, A

In the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the winning rate is not stable and lacks in fairness.
The object of the present invention is to realize a stable winning rate and to ensure the fairness of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine provided with a ball payout device for paying out gaming balls based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
The apparatus is characterized by further comprising exhaust heat supply means for supplying exhaust heat to a payout standby flow path on which gaming balls guided to the ball payout device are in a standby state.

  According to the present invention, since it is possible to realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining probability setting value change processing. It is a flowchart explaining a probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, (b) is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the definite condition monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the shift judging processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining schematic structure of a setting means and a game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 6th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in a 7th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 10th modification. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect in a 11th modification. It is a front view of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a ventilation drying device. It is a figure explaining the modification of a ventilation drying device. It is a figure explaining the modification of a ventilation drying device. It is a rear view of the game machine of the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example and modification of a heating drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of a heating drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of special fluctuation winning a prize device (big winning a prize mouth). It is a front view of the game machine of the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a ventilation effect drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blowing effect drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blowing effect drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blowing effect drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blowing effect drying apparatus. It is a rear view of the game machine of the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example and modification of a duct. It is a front view of the game board of the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a rocking member. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variable winning a prize device of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variable winning a prize device of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variable winning a prize device of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variable winning a prize device of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variable winning a prize device of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variable winning a prize device of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variable winning a prize device of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variable winning a prize device of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of an opening-and-closing member and a winning opening formation member.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower plate (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls which are paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation handle 24 of the ball striking device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball striking device is fed from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40, there is provided a panel effect device 44 forming a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special view variation display game by the movable effect member operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  In the lower left portion of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying the fourth symbol to execute the decorative special view variable display game separately from the decorative special view variable display game displayed on the display device 41, and displaying the number of starting memories An information display device 90 is provided.

  The sub information display device 90 is configured by a single light emitting unit forming a sub game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the first special view variable display game. A second sub formed of a sub game display portion 91 and a single light emitting portion forming a sub game display portion for displaying a fourth pattern for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the second special view variable display game And a game display unit 92. Furthermore, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game by two light emitting units, and a second special view variation display game by two light emission units And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories, which is the right to do.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special view variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner, and a display indicating the result are extinguished, blinked, or lit Can be displayed. In addition, the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 have the numbers of the first start storage (special figure 1 suspension) and the second start storage (special figure 2 suspension) turned off of the two light emitting units, respectively. It can be displayed by blinking or lighting.

  By providing the sub information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 41 without occupying the display region of the display device 41, and the display region is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operation of the board effect device 44. .

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (common view start gate, start area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the common view variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start area, an inflow area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal change winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure change display game is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the movable member 37b is always A closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow is maintained. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be possible to win rather than the open state.
In addition, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

Furthermore, a special variation that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-accepting state according to the result of the special view variation display game on the lower side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 and to the right of the start winning opening 36. A winning device (big winning opening) 38 is disposed.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the big winning opening (blocked state which is disadvantageous for the player) is converted into the opened state (which is advantageous for the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 has, for example, a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. During the state, the game ball is made easy to flow into the big winning hole by converting the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). It has become. In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the gaming balls having flowed into the large winning openings are detected by any of the large winning openings switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of large winning opening switch 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning in the start winning opening 36 and fires the game ball to the right side game area (so-called It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by right-handing.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming area, and is discharged to the right gaming area. The gaming ball thus formed is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside, The game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball flowing down the right play area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42 .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 for a first special figure fluctuation display game including a seven-segment type indicator (LED lamp) or the like and a second special figure The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display section 53 for the common drawing fluctuation display game composed of the LED lamps (common drawing indicator), and the same LED lamp And storage display portions 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game configured as described above.
In addition, a first gaming state display unit (a first gaming state indicator, a right strike notification unit) 57 that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state in which the right strike is more advantageous than the left strike is available. The second gaming status display unit (second gaming status indicator, time saving status notification unit) 58 that lights up when a status occurs and reports the occurrence of a time saving condition, and the probability of a big hit when the gaming machine 10 is turned on with a high probability status 3rd game state indicator (3rd game state indicator, probability state indicator) 59 which indicates that it is, round indicator 60 which indicates the number of rounds at the time of big hit (number of times of opening and closing of special fluctuation winning device 38) Is provided.
The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies of the occurrence of the big hit.

The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments is also blinked to drive fluctuation. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the game result is “off”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of the off, and when the game result is “hit”, the hit result mode (special result mode) is not The game result is displayed with the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode turned on.

  The common indicator 53 blinks the lamp during fluctuation to indicate that it is fluctuating, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the common drawing reservation display 56 displays the number of starting memories (= the number of holdings) of the common drawing starting gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 53 by turning off, blinking and lighting a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 reserve display 54 has a plurality of LEDs, including the number of undivided balls (number of start memories = number of reserve) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 serving as the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51. Displayed by turning off, blinking or lighting. The special figure 2 reserve display 55 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of start memories (= number of reserve) of the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) which becomes the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52. Displayed by blinking or lighting.

  The first gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the light if the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game (normally hit) If the player is in a game state in which the right strike is more advantageous to the player than the left strike (right strike), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (time reduction state notification unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and in the normal game state where the time reduction state is not occurring (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated) If the time saving condition is occurring (during the fluctuation time shortening function operation), the lamp is turned on.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp if the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. If the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probable change state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 is configured of an LED lamp or the like. For example, the lamp is turned off when not in the special game state, and the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result in the special game state. Turn on the light. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. That is, it is a backup storage means capable of holding data stored even when the game control apparatus 100 is in the power-off state. Then, when power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state Condition), the operation condition (time-saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the drawing start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123 . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124.

  Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Furthermore, setting value change serving as detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value to be a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned to the third input port 124 Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

  The setting key switch 152 is for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit that constitutes the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit has a key hole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to be able to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the on state when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and in a state of not being turned to the second position. It will be off if there is any.

  The setting value change switch 151 is for detecting an operation of a setting value change button serving as a second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and turned off when not pressed.

  By operating these operation units, it is possible to select the probability setting value to which the probability value to be the special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six of setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared as probability setting values. Probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, 1/280 for setting 5, and 6 for setting 6 It is said to be 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

  When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the setting key operation unit setting key is turned to the second position, and the probability setting value is obtained by turning on the power of the gaming machine. The probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value changing state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

  When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the game machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operating unit is In the case of turning to the second position, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 but the probability setting value can not be changed.

  The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the probability setting value with numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, as long as the display mode can recognize the probability setting value. In addition, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and information on the probability setting value may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the character / object ratio. In this case, while operating on the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), information on the probability setting value is displayed, and in the other cases, the calculated base value and item ratio Give priority to the display.

  In the present embodiment, a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153 and the like are provided in the game control apparatus 100, and the probability value used by the game control apparatus 100 for lottery of the special view fluctuation display game The probability setting value to which is assigned is a setting means that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by the operation of the operation unit. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control apparatus 100. That is, setting means may be provided separately from the game control apparatus 100. In this case, an operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control apparatus 100 and the probability setting value may be changed by the game control apparatus 100. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control apparatus 100.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that gaming balls are stored in the lower plate 23 more than a predetermined amount (full)), Touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) Based on the detection at the out switch detecting all the game balls which have been fired to the game area 32 and finished the game. The first input port 122 is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 is provided via the data bus 140 takes in the Ku signal).

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of In addition, the second output port 134 outputs display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the bonus ratio.

  The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 153 for displaying the selected probability setting value.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 , The fifth for receiving the display data output from the second output port 134 and causing the state display device 160 to display Driver 138e is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. 4.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; a game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the provided panel effect device 44 (for example, a movable character that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and the like, and forms a movable effect device which performs game effects including a special view change display game A presentation device may be provided, and a frame presentation movable body control circuit may be provided to drive and control the frame presentation device.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. And, when the game ball wins the general winning a prize opening 35, the starting winning a prize opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 or the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38, the prize balls of the number according to the kind of the winning a prize opening won out From the dispensing unit controlled according to FIG. 3), it is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven in passes through the inside of the drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the number of common drawing start memories is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34. If it is less than (1), the common drawing start memory number is added (+1) and one common drawing start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning combination is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 56 of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

  If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 predetermines a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined fluctuation time in the common drawing indicator 53 provided on the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the common drawing fluctuation display game. After displaying the common map during the repeated display in the above order, a processing for displaying the common map change display game is performed to stop and display the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result. In addition, the ordinary drawing display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may configure.

  If the result of the popular drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes any of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect in the common symbol display 53 according to the type of hit. The stop display is performed, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern which is a result of the deviation on the common drawing display 53.

  In addition, the winning balls to the start winning hole 36 and the winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a respectively provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the first start memory, which makes a start memory (a special figure start memory) based on winning on the start winning hole 36, is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition to storing, the second starting memory which makes starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the prize winning to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four pieces) as a limit. A big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on winning on the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the extracted disturbances are extracted The numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the number of stored start-up memories is displayed on the special view 1 reserve display 54 and the special view 2 reserve display 55 of the collective display 50, and the special view start store is also displayed on the display 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. In addition, it is displayed also on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. The determined big hit determination random number value is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability setting value, and a process of determining the hit of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

  And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters) corresponding to the special view change display game on the display device 41 (the change display device). A process of displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which a symbol etc. is variably displayed is displayed. Further, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs processing for displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special view variable display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  And, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect to the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. While displaying a lighting pattern, the processing which generates a special game state and a small hit game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

  In the processing to generate the special gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A of the gaming control device 100 opens the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and plays the game into the big winning opening Control to allow inflow of balls. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the time saving state (specific gaming state, common drawing high probability state, second operation state) as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state It has become. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state. That is, the operation state of the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is controlled in any one of the first operation state and the second operation state in which winning is easier than the first operation state. .

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the common game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 being opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (general electric station opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time), The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stopping symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. In addition, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special view change display game and the second special view change display game, and the special view change display game can be executed, the second special view change display game is It is to be executed (prioritized). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 38a, an out switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished the game, has a coil for detecting magnetism, and utilizes the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Noncontact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) for detecting Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  A signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and a signal from the main frame opening detection switch are input to the third input port 124, and the third input port 124 receives the third waiting time before the start of the standby time. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 when the power is turned on, and the open state of the front frame 12 (body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 forms an open / close detection means capable of detecting the open / close state of the front frame 12. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 open and the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed It becomes. In addition, when the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without setting the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button can not be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, it is considered that the front frame 12 is opened.

  By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a bothersome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the initialization operation performed at the time of power on can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check (step S8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example 5 Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S19). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means at the time of power on is valid. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change state (step S21). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set.

  If it is in the probability setting value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform processing of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is shut off while the probability setting value is changing, and the data in the RAM is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is again set. The value is changed. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S21; N), it is determined whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier (step S22).

  In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for probability setting values, an area for initial value random numbers, an area for variation pattern random numbers, an area for game control, and an area for state display are set in order from the top. In the area for probability setting value, there is a probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value currently set, and a working area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value. Be done. The work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In the area for initial value random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value random number, a small hit symbol initial value random number, a hit initial value random number, and a hit symbol initial value random number which are updated as needed are stored. In addition, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 updated as needed are stored in the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers. Further, in the area for game control, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored, and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for displaying a state, a work area in which information necessary for displaying a base value, a feature ratio, and the like is stored, and a stack area are set.

  The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected at the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game and the number of payouts based on the winnings in the winning area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. In addition, the item ratio is the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending of the total number of balls (total number of balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 until the present time The percentage (the so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of winning balls (the number of balls earned by character) obtained by winning the big winning opening in the middle) is the information necessary to display the character ratio For example, includes information on the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls), and information on the number of winning balls (number of balls obtained by character).

  The RAM clear top address 2 is the top address of the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the random value random number are processed by clearing the RAM with this address set. The game control area is cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Also, the RAM clear top address 1 described later is the top address of the area for probability setting value, and the area for probability setting value, initial value random number is obtained by performing processing to clear the RAM with this address set. The area for the area, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the game control (the work area and the stack area) are cleared. Furthermore, the RAM clear top address 3 described later is the top address of the game control area, and the game control area is cleared by performing processing to clear the RAM with this address set. Become.

  The status display area is judged to be correct in status display edit output processing in timer interrupt processing to be described later, and is initialized if it is abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear top address 1 set in the case is set, the state display area may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear top address 1 is set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

  In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and later-described step S57, a checksum is calculated for only the game control work area. Note that one or more of the area for probability setting value, the area for initial value random number, the area for variation pattern random number, the area for game control, and the area for state display may be used. When a plurality of areas are targeted, the checksums of the respective areas may be calculated individually, and the legitimacy may be determined individually, or the checksums of the respective areas may be summed and the legitimacy may be calculated. It may be determined collectively.

  If the body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance (step S23). When the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and performs processing of initializing the RAM and processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state. If the setting key switch is not on (step S23; N) or if the body frame is not open (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and the state of the third input port 124 read in advance Then, it is determined whether or not the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S24).

  When the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and the process in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is performed. If the setting value change switch is on (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41, and initialization of the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for gaming control Do the processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The initialization means to initialize the

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25. Then, the process of initializing all RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for probability setting value and the RAM area for state display are initialized only when the RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

  First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is judged from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance whether the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). If the body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance (step S27). If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform processing of initializing the RAM and processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state. As described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for probability setting value, initial value random number is used. The area of the variable pattern random number area and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to save the initial value. The state display area may also be initialized here.

  If the setting key switch is not on (step S27; N) or if the body frame is not open (step S26; N), the command (specific information) for setting change instruction is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28) to prohibit RAM access (step S29), stop the control, and wait for the power of the gaming machine to shut off. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the setting change instruction command. The notification that prompts the user to change the probability setting value is performed, for example, by outputting voices from the speakers 19a and 19b. This notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  In this case, the power supply of the gaming machine is turned off, and then the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position with the front frame 12 opened. If the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. The switch is determined to be on (step S27; Y), and the process proceeds to step S35 to perform a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state. When the control is stopped by shifting to step S29, the power supply of the gaming machine is shut off and then the front frame 12 is not opened or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not rotated to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the state can not be shifted to the probability setting value change state, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

  In addition, although it is made to alert | report by transmitting setting change instruction | command command to the production control apparatus 300 in step S28, you may make it the game control apparatus 100 alert | report. For example, notification may be performed on the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control apparatus 100, and a display not used as identification information is performed on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52. It is also possible to provide a display for reporting an abnormality.

  In step S30 of FIG. 6 as processing when the power is restored normally from the power failure, the initial value upon power failure restoration is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S31).

  Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S31; N), the process skips steps S32 and S33 and shifts to step S34. If the special drawing is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S33).

  And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S34), step S45 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, screen designation A plurality of commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command in the customer waiting state, and a recovery screen command in other cases) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  The screen designation command transmits a command according to the resumed game state. When the special view variation display game interrupted due to the power supply interruption is resumed with the restart of control, the recovery screen command forming the recovery information is transmitted as the screen designation command. Further, in this case, the information on the result of the special view fluctuation display game to be resumed is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is shut off while waiting for customers and the control is resumed in the waiting for customers state due to restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, when the special gaming state interrupted by the power-off is to be resumed along with the resumption of control, the special gaming state resume command is transmitted as the screen designation command.

  Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S35) to initialize the process of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value to a state where the probability setting value can be changed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed up information is normal and the process proceeds from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear top address 2 is set, an area for initial value random numbers, an area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for the state display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be cleared.

  On the other hand, when the backed up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the variation pattern random number And the game control area (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an initialization unit capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The state display area may also be initialized here.

  Further, the area to be initialized is an area where it is desired to set a value other than 0 among the areas cleared to 0, for example, an area related to setting of a customer waiting demo area and an effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value becomes setting 1 by setting 0 in the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability, it is possible to minimize the damage to the game arcade even when the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or a wrongdoing. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, it is possible to set a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) when all of the RAM area is initialized.

  Thereafter, a probability setting value change in progress flag is set as processing for changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state (step S37). As a result, the probability setting value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, information of the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153 can be displayed.

  Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the operation probability setting value area (step S39), and the command under the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40) , Shift to step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command under probability setting change. A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is provided by the operation, the output of voices by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, setting for outputting a security signal is also performed. In this case, the timer may be set to output the security signal for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability setting value is changed. Further, since the initialization of the RAM has not been performed yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be performed.

  Further, as the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, at step S41 of FIG. 6, the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42). The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be stored (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the RAM area (the work area and the stack area) for game control are cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. In addition, setting of a timer for outputting a security signal is also performed. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an initialization unit capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting value change button).

  Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, RAM initial A plurality of commands such as an activation command (a command for displaying a notification of RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) while transmitting a customer waiting demo screen) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  In step S45, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S45, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S46). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the common drawing (hit random number), RWM specified as the initial value (start value) of the random number to determine the hit symbol of the common drawing (hit symbol random number) After saving in the area (step S47), the interrupt is permitted (step S48). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S49) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 updated). Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hitting symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display It is a random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the small hitting stop design of the game. In addition, "the initial value random value per hit" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit for the common pattern variation display game, and "the initial value random symbol per pattern" is a stop symbol for the common pattern variation display game A random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing. In addition, small hit design random numbers naturally do not exist in models without small hits. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no hit symbol initial value random number.

  Also, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured as. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method of changing the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, 2) for checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus and checking is set (step S50). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number update process (step S49), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing in step S49 above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination (step S51) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S53) A process (step S54) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S55), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S56). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating a checksum at power-off of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) capable of external operation, and an initialization operation unit. And initialization means (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time. It becomes.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

  In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process may return to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeated until the setting key switch is turned on. . That is, the control of the game may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made not based on the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6, but on the basis of the state of the third input port 124 at the present time. Furthermore, when the state in which the processes in steps S26 to S28 are repeatedly performed continues for a predetermined time, the process may move to step S29 to wait for the interruption of the power.

  Furthermore, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state where the probability setting value can be changed is that the main frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state. The open state of the frame 12 may not be a condition. In addition, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be conditions, or the opening of the glass frame 15 may be only.

  Further, without providing the setting key switch, the state may be shifted to the probability setting value changing state only on the condition that the setting value changing switch is in the on state. That is, without performing the processes of steps S22 and S23, the process may move to step S35 of FIG. 6 when the setting value change switch is on at step S24 (step S24; Y). In this case, although the process of steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control is not performed, the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state It is possible to initialize only the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control by ending without setting or setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability setting value changing state only on the condition that the setting value changing switch is on as described above, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Storage means (RAM 111 C) which comprises setting means (gaming control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the change switch 151), and the control means is capable of holding stored contents even when the power is shut off ), The validity determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the probability setting value is selected. And an initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit, and the validity determination unit determines that the information stored in the storage unit is not valid. When it is determined that the notification has been made, the notification to prompt the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information on the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. However, the initialization prompting to select the probability setting value is performed. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value being unintended by the game arcade from being set.

  The control means is configured to be able to select the probability setting value when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means by the validity determination means is If it is determined that the notification is not valid, the notification to prompt the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is shut off. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  Further, the control means is configured to stop the control of the game and wait for the selection of the probability setting value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means are provided. When it is determined by the validity determination means that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means On the basis of the reception of the probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  Further, when the specific information is received, the effect control means continues to notify the user to select the probability setting value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in the gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state for giving the player the gaming value The first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value) are control means (game control apparatus 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned. A setting unit (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of a change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the control unit can hold stored contents even when the power is shut off If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, recovery is performed based on the information stored and held in the storage unit, and the power is turned off. At the same time, when the first operation unit is operated, it is in a changeable state that allows the probability setting value to be changed by the setting means, and when only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, storage is performed. It means that the means has been initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  In addition, the control means includes legitimacy determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the validity determination means stores the information in the storage means. If it is determined that the information being processed is not valid and the first operation unit has not been operated, a notification prompting initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state.

  Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state enabling change of the probability setting value by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. And the first operation unit is operated when it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is not valid by the validity determination unit and the first operation unit is not operated. The notification for prompting the user to turn on the power is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state.

  In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in the gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state for giving the player the gaming value Control means (game control apparatus 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned, a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change Necessary for controlling the game by setting means (game control apparatus 100) which can be selected from plural types of probability setting values by the operation of the switch 151) and control means including information of probability setting values selected by the setting means Storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information, and the control means is configured to turn on the game machine when a predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units is operated. Storage means so that the was is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, random number update processing 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, which is the target of the initial value random number update processing (step S105) First, random number update processing 2 (step S106) is performed to update the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 2. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a of common drawing, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 38a, monitoring of error ( A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are opened.

  Next, a probability setting value change process (step S108) is performed to perform processing regarding change and confirmation of the probability setting value, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is changed (step S109). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S109; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed.

  When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; N), a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 as a process related to the progression of the game. A special drawing game process (step S112) for performing a process related to a figure variation display game and a common drawing game process (step S113) for performing a process related to a common drawing variation display game are performed. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (step S109; Y) or if it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing relating to the game. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is determined that the game can not be progressed.

  If the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode is selected, the payout command transmission processing (step S111), the special figure game processing (step S112), and the common-play game processing (step S113) are not performed. However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed to pay out the winning balls. Also, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the random number updating process 1 (step S105) or the random number updating process 2 (step S106) is not performed in the probability setting value change state, and the random number update is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. You may Further, the types of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

  Next, segment LED editing processing (step S114) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S114) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115) which performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S117) of setting signals output to various external devices to the output buffer is performed, and a base value is obtained from the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. The state display editing and output process is performed to calculate the and the like (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the common control solenoid 37c are synthesized and output (step S142).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S146).

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display portions provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S149), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 ", data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S150), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S151).

  Next, off output data of probability setting value display is set as display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether a probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability setting value.

  If the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output of the probability setting value display The data is output to the port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value display unit 153 displays the probability setting value. On the other hand, when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability setting value display (step S155). In this case, the off output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S156). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S157).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S158). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S159). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S160).

  Next, test signal output data of the probability setting value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability setting value display data is loaded as test signal output data from the probability setting value display data area. That is, for the information on the probability setting value among the test signals to the test sampling device, the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 is used as it is. As a result, the processing is simplified, and the information of the probability setting value does not change, and accurate information can be output. Of course, display data may be converted into value information and output.

  Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S162), and when it is not in the on state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is on (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. Thereafter, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus (step S164), and the output processing is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, by the output of the main winning ball signal, when the payout of the gaming ball such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the winning ball signal is delayed with the payout of the gaming ball, and the correct occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

  If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the game ball to the winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) provided in the game area 32 Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control device) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means 200), and the game control means controls the payout ball command based on the status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The control to transmit to the means is performed, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is outputted from the payout control device. Payment The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over the predetermined period without transmitting to the control means. It will be like that.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas with different numbers of winning balls (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38), and the game control means (game control device 100) The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) which can specify the presence or absence of non-transmission of the prize ball command which instructs the payout control of the game ball for every prize ball number, the state signal can start the payout control , And when there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates the payout control means It will be made to specify before specification of whether or not the payout control can be started before specification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter.

  In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a winning ball command is issued based on the winning of the gaming ball to a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38). A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a game, and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing a payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command sent from the game control means; The control means is configured to control the payout ball command when the status signal output from the payout control means and indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball signal transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) to be sent to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in a predetermined prize area. Of the gaming machine The external information output means (game control apparatus 100) to output to the unit, and the external information output means determines whether the state signal output from the payout control means can start the payout control or not The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation) The winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the winning device 38), and one winning ball command is paid out when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The game ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the winnings in units of one winning on a predetermined winning area, and can play the game on the predetermined winning area. Ball winning The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means, and the external information output means is configured to perform predetermined winnings. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls determined to be paid out with the game ball to the area, and to output a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, and the winning ball signal counter The information of the winning can be stored on the basis of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the game ball is updated at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area, and the number of winning balls by the external information output means is accumulated. By updating in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the accumulation processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes ten, and the payout control device 200 has ten game balls paid out. The main prize ball signal is output each time
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output frequency by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time the payout command is transmitted), and updates (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs set.
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value changing state is set (step S299). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S299; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed.

  When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the process after step S301 is performed as a process regarding progress of a game. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (step S299; Y) or in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is determined that the game can not be progressed without performing the processing relating to the winning.

  In the probability setting value change state or in the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is to monitor the fraud and prize of the special fluctuation winning device 38, monitor the fraud and prize of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and can always win the prize opening. It is not necessary to monitor the winnings of the above, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, the fraud monitoring of the special variation winning device 38 or the normal variation winning device 37 may be performed. Also, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the types of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

  In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large despite the opening. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize at the prize opening and to detect a normal prize.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, a fraud winning The information of the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning is achieved despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open. An illegal and prize monitoring process (step S304) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the mouth and to detect a normal prize.

  Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Puden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an unfair winning in the Fuden despite the fact that it is not open At the same time, a fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed to detect a normal prize. Then, the prize hole monitor table of the prize hole switch (for example, the starting hole 1 switch 36a and the prize hole switch 35a of the general prize hole 35) which can always be prized is prepared (step S307) A process (step S308) is performed.

  Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

Probability setting value change processing
FIG. 11 shows the probability setting value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value changing state is set (step S401), and if it is not the probability setting value changing state (step S401; N), a process of enabling confirmation of the probability setting value The probability setting value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing process is ended.

  If the probability setting value change state is determined (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 . If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, information on the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the above-described output process (see FIG. 8). If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the above-described output processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the probability setting value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed is a state in which a probability setting value to be used in the game is newly set by performing a determination operation described later, and in this case, a probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406).

  Then, in the determination whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether the probability setting value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

  In addition, when there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406; Y), the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0-5. The values of 0 to 5 in the working probability setting value area correspond to setting 1 to setting 6, respectively, and the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. The probability setting value to be selected changes sequentially. When the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by 1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the work probability setting value area is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the determination operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Moreover, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to set it as numbers other than this.

  Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). Thus, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information of the newly selected probability setting value. Then, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and blank display is performed without displaying anything as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button. Will be displayed. By doing this, it can be understood that the display has been updated.

  Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but a display other than this may be used. For example, when displaying with probability setting value by 1 to 6 numbers, display other than this number may be specified display. That is, the specific display may not be used as the display of the probability setting value. In addition, when displaying the display of the probability setting value in a continuous lighting state, the display of the probability setting value after updating may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the elapse of the specific display. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode to blink, a display mode in which the flickering cycle is different from when it is not the specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the case where the display is not specific .

  Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, and the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 46, the panel effect device 44 The specific notification which is the notification that the selected probability setting value has been changed may be performed by the operation of the above, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like. That is, specific notification may be performed in combination with or in place of the specific display. Further, the display similar to the probability setting value display device 153 may be performed on the display device 41, the special view 1 display 51, and the special view 2 display.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting the touch of the human body on the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is a touch. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change processing is ended. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). Thereby, the selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value to be used for the game. That is, it is a determination operation of determining the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be used as the confirmation operation, or an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

  Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), a command of probability setting value change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value changing process is ended. . In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command of probability setting value change. The notification that the probability setting value has been changed is performed by the operation, the output of voice by the speakers 19a, 19b, or the like.

  On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not turned off (step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value changing process is ended. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417). The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

  As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. In addition, setting of a timer for outputting a security signal is also performed. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the state display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may be cleared. In addition, the area related to the change work such as the work probability set value area for temporarily storing information of the probability set value selected in the probability set value change state and various flags in the area for the probability set value is cleared. Ru. Therefore, since the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is ended. In addition, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value changing state ends.

  Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and the probability setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) Step S421) The processing proceeds to step S48 of the main processing shown in FIG. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command of probability setting value change. The notification that the change of the probability setting value has ended is performed by the operation, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, model designation command, special figure 1 pending number command, special figure 2 pending number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command to end change (displaying a customer waiting demo screen, and a command for notifying of the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command of termination of probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of probability setting values. And a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) for displaying information of the selected probability setting value, and the setting unit is based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated in response to the selection operation of the probability setting value, the specific display is performed over a predetermined period from the update. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

  Further, the setting means displays a display not used as a display of the information of the probability setting value as the specific display. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

  In addition, the setting means displays the updated information in a manner different from that after the elapse of the predetermined period over the predetermined period as the specific display. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability setting value changing process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, it is first determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed. In this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined because the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is set.

  If the mode is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (step S433).

  During the game is during the execution of the special figure change display game, during the execution of the common view change display game, during the special game state or during the hit state of the common view. That is, it is a case where the state of the game is a prohibition state which prohibits the probability setting value confirmation mode from being started. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. That is, when in the game, it does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. In this case, information may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 indicating that it is not possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode since the game is being played, and notification may be made to that effect.

  The conditions for determining that a game is in progress (prohibited state) is not limited to the one described above. The special figure variation display game may be executed, the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special gaming state, or one or more states selected from among the hitting state of the general figure as a condition, for example, the special figure A game may be in progress if any of the variation display game is being executed or in the special game state. In addition, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  In addition, even if it does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode as the game is in progress for a predetermined period after detecting the gaming balls with the out switch which detects all the gaming balls which are shot to the game area 32 and finished the game. good. In addition, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. In addition, it is possible not to shift to the probability setting value check mode during the power saving mode, which is shifted when a certain period of time elapses while a game is not being performed. The power saving mode is released as the front frame 12 is opened, and being in the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

  If the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state, that is, the operation unit is operated to be in the predetermined state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the on state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. If the setting key switch is on (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, and information of the probability setting value currently set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), and the command under confirmation of the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438). finish. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output over a predetermined period as external information. Further, in the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the panel effect based on reception of the command under probability setting value confirmation. By the operation of the device 44, the output of voices by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like, notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed is provided.

  On the other hand, when in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. In this case, the probability setting value confirmation mode continues.

  If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Then, a command for ending the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (the effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. In the effect control device 300, the notification that the confirmation of the probability setting value is in progress is ended based on the reception of the command of the probability setting value confirmation end.

  That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position in a state where the power is turned on, and is ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

  As described above, by not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode even when the setting key switch is turned on when playing the game, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. , Fairness of the game can be secured. It should be noted that although in the game, the setting key switch is not switched to the probability setting value confirmation mode even when the setting key switch is turned on, but the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in progress When it becomes, it transfers to probability setting value confirmation mode from that time. By doing this, since it becomes possible to automatically check the probability setting value when the game does not progress, the efficiency of the confirmation operation can be improved.

  In addition, although the condition for preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress during the game, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the condition transitions to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100 What is necessary is to select whether or not to. For example, when in the high probability state, the mode may not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as described later, when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the mode may not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by the operation of the change switch 151), and the setting means is based on the operation unit being operated to be in a predetermined state If it is possible to set a confirmation state in which confirmation of the probability setting value is possible and the gaming state controlled by the control means is a prohibition state that prohibits the start of the confirmation state, Work unit is that it has not to a confirmation state be a predetermined state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience due to the indication of the probability setting value.

  Also, the prohibited state is that the game is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  In addition, the prohibited state is a state in which a special gaming state is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  In addition, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball can not be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be won easily, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 capable of generating the right to execute the game by winning is satisfied. Based on the regular drawing game (general drawing variation display game) is executed, and when the result of the general drawing game becomes a specific result, the hit state (general drawing hit state) to convert the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the open state A normal fluctuation winning device control means (game control device 100) which can be generated, and the prohibited state is a state in which the regular game is being executed or in the hit state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  In the setting means, the operation part is brought into the predetermined state in a state in which the state of the game controlled by the control means is in the prohibition state, and the prohibition state is ended when the prohibition state is ended while being in the predetermined state. It will be in a confirmation state based on the end. Therefore, since it becomes possible to automatically check the probability setting value when the game does not progress, the efficiency of the checking operation can be improved.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the figure variation display game.

  Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hitting middle process (step A16) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing, etc. .
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle process, a small hit end process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the above.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the control of the special symbol variation by the special view 1 display 51 is performed . And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A22) concerning the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed , The special figure game processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. (1) It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 An effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player strikes the left at the first starting opening (start winning opening 36), and does not win the prize unless the player normally strikes the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the first start port (start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A109), perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A110), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting opening It determines (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is done, it ends starting opening switch supervision processing. If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the winning absence information of the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37). The setting is made (step A121), and it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), hard random number acquisition processing finish.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the special view starting opening switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is Load the starting opening signal output count which is the number of outputs to the external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133) ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start aperture signal output number area of RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends.

  In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of specially-designated 1 reservations or specially-designated number 2) is updated +1 Step A136) Save the target starting opening winning flag (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 of hard random number acquisition processing is stored as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a winning on the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the first starting opening has been won (step A142; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A143), RWM small hit symbols It saves in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure holding information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special view reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and execute the special view start aperture switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and starts the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number as the upper limit as storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special view starting opening switch common processing is checked to determine whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting opening 36). (Step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that a winning on the first starting opening has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether the special drawing time is short (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small hit (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit (step A153; Y), the processing for determining the special map reservation information ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A156), and at step A140 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that it is not a winning on the first starting opening (step A158; N), stop symbol information of the release is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first starting opening has been won (step A158; Y), the big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not A small hit determination process (step A159) to determine whether or not to perform. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special view starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A 167).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A168), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A <b> 169) The special-image hold information determination process ends.

  The big hit determination process in step A 157 and the small hit determination process in step A 159 are the same as the processes shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process. That is, the determination according to the set probability setting value is performed. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special view 2 reservation number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, if it is determined that the special drawing 1 reservation number is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step A309) A309; N) sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and an effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special processing game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step A316), and the special view ordinary processing is ended. That is, when it is possible to start the special view variation display game but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command forming the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has been started at step A309 (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the process of steps A310 to A312.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” at step A301 (step A301; N), a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step A302). Next, an effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.
If the special drawing 1 holding number is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decoration special drawing holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is prepared (step A306). Next, a rendering command setting process (step A307) is performed, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is performed when the special figure 2 pending number is not “0” by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. Will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321). In order to determine whether the special figure variation display game is a big hit, shift information and big hit information is set in the big hit flag 1 to determine whether the first special figure variation display game is a small hit or not A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set the shift information and the small hit information to the small hit flag of.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A327) is performed.

Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area Here, 100 ms is set (step A333). Next, an initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" associated with the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A 352), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area Here, 100 ms is set (step A353). Then, an initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

  When selecting a variation pattern of the special view variation display game in the special view 1 variation start process or the special view 2 variation start process described above, information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability setting value, or changing the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit determination value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit determination value in the high probability state and the upper limit determination value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are respectively defined. Here, the corresponding table is set in accordance with the currently set probability setting value. Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the jackpot determination can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

  Next, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is made different according to the probability setting value or probability state. Also good. In this case, similarly to the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is specified for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be put together to form a judgment value table.

  If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Note that the disconnection in step A 389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in the small hit determination processing later. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A384). Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is acquired (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A387) ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A387) . The upper limit judgment value acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A 381 described above.

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A 322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process .

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the small hitting determination process, first, a small hitting upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hitting upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value at the same probability setting value do not overlap. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value of different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

  Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hitting lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), the judgment result is set as a deviation (step A404), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hitting upper limit judgment value (step A403).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a gap is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

  As in the case of the big hit determination, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit determination value in the big hit determination and the small hit upper limit determination value in the small hit determination may be collectively defined in a determination value table provided for each probability setting value. Furthermore, although the value of the small hitting lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different, the small hitting lower limit judgment value may be made different depending on the probability setting value, and in this case, according to the probability setting value The small hit lower limit judgment value is selected.

  In addition, in the process of setting the upper limit setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hitting upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), the probability setting value referred to is indicated. If the value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, the setting may be performed as a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or an abnormality occurs. The game may be stopped and an error may be notified. Also, although the probability setting value is referred to for each determination of the big hit and each determination of the small hit, when setting the probability setting value in the probability setting value change state, the upper limit setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value Alternatively, processing for setting the small hitting upper limit judgment value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when judging the big hit or judging the small hit.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) is prepared (step A601), and rendering command setting A process is performed (step A602). That is, a symbol stop command forming stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In response to the reception of the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and displays the result as a stop.

  Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 ms as the display time regardless of whether the stop design pattern is a removal design pattern, a big hit design pattern or a small hit design pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop design pattern. . That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

  Subsequently, the processing number "2" according to the processing during the special figure display is set as the processing number (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 (for example, the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A 607), and the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Save the fluctuation signal in the test signal output data area (Step A608) and set the number of times the symbol is determined to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A 609). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A610) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611) The special figure changing process ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701). The small hit flag area is cleared (step A702).
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) A process (Step A704) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 705) and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal for the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the commodity continuous operation device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A 708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706) and a big hit (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit ("16" or "4" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is acquired. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit value area of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716) Do A717). The fanfare command forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

  Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A 718, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON if the big hit with popped out (big prize opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opened information 1), the big hit without popping out (so-called, 確 certain big hit etc. Large winning opening open If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it will be OFF otherwise. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.

  After that, the big hit opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game The setting is made (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step A722), the special winning a prize winning opening which corresponds to the special winning opening information The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A 724) is performed to shift to the fanfare / interval processing, and the special view display processing is terminated. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 725; Y), a high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high probability state The probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high by performing high probability fluctuation number update processing (step A 726) for updating the value of (the high probability fluctuation number) and presentation mode information check processing (step A 727) related to setting of the rendering mode. It is determined whether it is a probability state (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special drawing high probability is not found (step A728; N), the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability of the special view is being reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played In order not to make the person conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, “7” for the small hit fanfare medium processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 736), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for big hit is ON (big hit + small hit output) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A739), and the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed command (fire position designation signal 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), the high probability fluctuation number for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in high probability state. High probability change count update processing (step A 743) for updating the value of the area (high probability change count), presentation mode information check processing regarding setting of presentation mode (step A 744), switching preparation remaining rotation corresponding to presentation mode number A number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A746). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746; N), "0" relating to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A749) The special figure game process number area saves the process number (step A750) and clears the variation symbol determination flag area (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 752), and the special view display processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command setting is made. After performing the process (step A 748), the process proceeds to step A 749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general prize winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, the common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the regular drawing game process number is "3" in step B7, then the regular processing per medium drawing or the setting of information necessary for performing the routine charge residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Then, after preparing the common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary design by the common drawing display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control processing related to the control of the fluctuation of the ordinary design by the common drawing display 53 (step B15) is performed, and the common drawing game processing is finished.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the ordinary drawing routine, it is first determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y ) Sets "0" relating to the ordinary drawing routine processing as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the ordinary drawing game processing number area (step B323). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

  In addition, when the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) Clear the loaded area, that is, the per random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the per symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (step B302), and there is a probability that it will be a hit result in the common drawing variation display game It is determined whether it is in the common map high probability raised higher than the normal probability (that is, the common map low probability), that is, in the short time state (step B303).

If the common drawing high probability is not (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the common drawing low probability is set (step B304), and the common drawing high probability is in progress (step B303) ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the drawing high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306). If the value of the random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), the value of the random number is greater than or equal to step B304 or B305. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set in (step B307).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper determination value (step B306; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the per-flag In the area, save the misplacement information (step B308), set the disappointing stop symbol number (step B309), save the disappointing symbol information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B310), stop the common symbol number stop Save to the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the random number per hit is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the load loaded in step B302 The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is common drawing stop symbol Save to the area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”. Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.
Moreover, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation pattern random number 3 is saved in the popular game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B 321) is performed to shift to the common drawing variation processing, and the common drawing routine processing is ended. That is, the game execution means for the game control device 100 to execute the common view change display game as the variable display game (based on the common view start storage) based on the detection of the gaming ball in the common view start gate 34 (inflow area). I
In the case of this embodiment, in step B320, 500 ms is set with a probability of 200/256, 1500 ms is set with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 ms is set with a probability of 16/256. .

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the general drawing variation processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" for the general drawing display processing (step B401), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area. (Step B402). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing display 53 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B403). Save the signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation in progress signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B404), and set the stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped to the common drawing fluctuation control flag area After saving (step B405), the general drawing variation processing is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the processing for displaying the generic drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. Then (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  If the hit flag is not hit information (step B 503; N), “0” is set as the processing number for the ordinary processing of the drawing (step B 515), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing during the routine drawing display is ended.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 Or “5”) and save it in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4" or "7") corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the common drawing hit end pointer area (step B506). Next, a general power release time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B507).

  Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the common drawing per process (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B509). After that, the test signal is a signal relating to the start of hitting the common drawing variation display game (for example, the signal during medium symbol 1 is normally ON) and a signal regarding the start of power operation (for example, the signal during normal motor vehicle 1 operation is ON) In order to save in the output data area (step B510) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common power solenoid, the on data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area (step B511).

  Furthermore, the information of the common charge count number area which stores the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is cleared (step B 512), the common power which memorizes the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 in the common electric power fraud monitoring period The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag for defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize apparatus 37 (flag outside the fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing of the common map display is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the control pointer per common drawing loaded is equal to or more than the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer in the common drawing (step B603) A branch process is performed according to the value before +1 updating in B603 (step B604).
If the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the processing in the common drawing in the step B603 is not updated by +1, and the processing in the common drawing is not performed. Branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B604).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0”, “2” or “5”, the process proceeds to step B 605 and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus corresponding to the control pointer is operated to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 The wait time after blocking 37 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B605), and the off data is saved in the common electric solenoid output data area to turn off the common electric solenoid 37c (step B606). Ends processing during each drawing.

  When the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 607 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer In order to save the general power release time, which is the open time, in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B607), and to turn on the general power solenoid 37c, save ON data in the general power solenoid output data area (step B608) End the process during the popular map.

  If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609, where it is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer in order to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The general power release time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B609), and the ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B610). End the process.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform generalization residual ball processing, so the processing number Is set as "4" (step B611). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B612), and the general electric power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B613). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37 c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B 614), and the processing of the common drawing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, 300 ms is used as a wait time, in step B607, 1700 ms as a power open time, in step B609 as 2600 ms as power open time, in step B613. Save 600 ms as the normal charge residual ball processing time.
Furthermore, when the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 1”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the stop symbol display shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the general drawing display processing, "1700 milliseconds" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the PV release time is "1700 ms", the PV is released for 1700 ms, and then the weight of 300 ms is waited because the control pointer is "0" per blow. Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 1700 ms, and then 300 ms since the control pointer during the expansion is updated to "2". The wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the general drawing, 600 ms. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.

  Further, if the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 2”, “5” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the during stop processing shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the general drawing display processing, "2600 milliseconds" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, the normal charge release time is "2600 ms", and the normal charge is released for 2600 ms, and then the weight of 300 ms is waited because the control pointer is "5". Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 2600msec, and then the control pointer is updated to "7" during the normal drawing, and then 600msec. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set. That is, when the game control means 100 executes the common-play game (common-play variation display game) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the result of the common-play game becomes a specific result, the normal change winning device 37 is opened. It constitutes a normal fluctuation winning device control means capable of generating a hit state (normal state hit state) to be converted.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, no glass frame opening error occurs (step S801; N), and no main body frame opening error occurs (step S802; N) The off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809). Transfer to processing of If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S 808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S 810 is not performed and the process of step S 810 is performed. Transition.

  Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), If the fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S817), save the on data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step S818), and shift to the process of step S819. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, there is no magnet fraud (step S 810; N), no board radio fraud (step S 811; N), no frame radio fraud (step S 812; N), no generation of general electricity fraud (Step S813; N) If it is not even the occurrence of the special winning opening fraud (Step S814; N), it is determined whether the switch abnormality is occurring (Step S815).
If the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If the switch abnormality is not occurring (step S815; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S 819) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S 820) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S 821). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then, the external information editing process is ended (step S823).
Also, if the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step In step S824, the external information editing process ends.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 32 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  Thereafter, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), and control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 The decoration control process to be performed (step C18) and the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the panel effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205). It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If ACT is determined to be the correct combination in step C234 in step C234 (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y), variation system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

  The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) that has not been executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to a predetermined degree of reliability, to perform the decoration special view start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal Effects such as effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

  Further, with regard to commands relating to power on and commands relating to probability setting values, corresponding processing is performed in single-shot system command processing. The commands related to power on include a command upon power failure recovery and a command upon RAM initialization. The commands relating to the probability setting value include the commands of probability setting change, probability setting change end, probability setting change end, probability setting value confirmation, and probability setting value confirmation end during the probability setting change.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is made, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of the above, the state may be shifted to the probability setting value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized along with the end of the probability setting value change state, any of the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special game variation display game is being executed, the special game condition is in progress, or the common figure is hit. It may be a condition that it does not fall under either. In addition, it may be a condition that it is in a customer waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, the state may not be shifted to the probability setting value change state.

  Although the RAM 111C is initialized upon termination of the probability setting value change state, the RAM 111C may not be initialized except when it is determined that the data of the RAM 111C is abnormal.

  In addition, although probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different from each other, the same probability value may be allocated to different probability setting values. FIG. 35 (a) shows the probability setting value in the present embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is designed to take a value of 0-5. The same is true for the probability setting value area for work. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values of the probability setting value area. In the display of the probability setting value display device 153, 1 to 6 are displayed corresponding to the value of the probability setting value. As the probability values, different probability values are assigned to settings 1 to 6, respectively.

  FIG. 35 (b) shows an example in which assignment of probability values is different. In this example, probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability value of three levels substantially. Other than this is the same as FIG. In this way, when the six-step probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values may be made different, and design changes can be easily made.

  Note that which probability value is assigned to which probability setting value is free, and, for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (work probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by the operation of the setting value change button, the order of probability values changing when the setting value change button is operated is different by changing the assignment. It becomes order. Also, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to two probability setting values, the number of stages of change can be made into four stages, and it can be any stage of 1 to 6 stages.

  FIG. 35 (c) also shows an example in which the assignment of probability values is different. In this example, those which are setting 4 to setting 6 in FIG. 35B are setting 1 to setting 3, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is also setting 1 to 3 correspondingly. As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easy for the clerk performing the operation to grasp the probability value.

  FIG. 35 (d) also shows an example in which assignment of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display unit 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, only one probability value can be substantially set, and even when the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to cope with the setting of the value without changing the configuration of the game control apparatus 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is made on the probability set value display device 153, but as described above, the specific display (for example, blank display) is performed, whereby the operation is performed. Workers can easily understand that they have been accepted.

  Although the number of values in the probability setting value area is six, the number may be other than this. For example, in the case of FIG. 35 (b) or (c), the number of values of the probability setting value area may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. Further, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be seven or more in order to enable setting of more stages. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

  Also, although the big hit probability value is assigned according to the probability setting value, the small hit probability value is also assigned, and the small hit probability value is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be determined independently. However, when only a big hit and a small hit are made as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, it is necessary to set a small hit probability value according to the big hit probability value. Further, the probability setting value for setting the jackpot probability value and the probability setting value for setting the small hitting probability value may be set separately. Also, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Furthermore, the probability of the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game may also be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of the big hit, or may be set independently.

  When the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. Alternatively, the setting sub-substrate may be removed, and the sub-substrate subjected to termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion of the game control apparatus 100 with the setting sub-substrate. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and to reduce the cost. Further, in the gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, the operation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 transmits a command instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out.

  The payout control device 200 in the present modification includes storage means capable of retaining stored contents even in the power-off state. The storage means is adapted to store information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and payout is performed based on the information stored therein. As described above, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout command regardless of the status of the payout busy signal. . Therefore, the information on the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage unit of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). The payout control device 200 starts the payout based on the information backed up in its own storage means based on receiving the command of the payout instruction. By doing this, even when the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being damaged. it can.

  In addition to the notification of prompting the change of the probability setting value, the effect control device 300 also notifies that there is a possibility that the payout will be performed based on the reception of the setting change instruction command. It is good. Moreover, transmitting the command (specific information) of the payout instruction to the payout control device 200 is not limited to the above case. For example, in the case of transmitting the command in the probability setting change in FIG. Even when a command at the time of S40) and RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), a command (specific information) of the payout instruction may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Based on information from the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the game control means, effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effects of the game, and probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned Setting means (selectable probability setting value) can be selected from a plurality of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) Game control means 100), and payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of game media based on the payout information from the game control means; Memory means (RAM 111C) capable of holding stored contents even in the power-off state, and validity determination means (game control apparatus 100) for judging whether the information stored in the memory means at power-on is valid And initialization means (game control apparatus 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value, and stored in the storage means by the validity determination means When it is determined that the information is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means sets the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information. And the payout control means is provided with payout information storage means capable of storing the stored contents even in the power-off state, and capable of storing the payout information received from the game control means, and the specific information When signal, and it has to perform control to pay out game media based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to urge the return to the normal state, and to prevent the player from losing the profit obtained. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information on the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. However, the initialization prompting to select the probability setting value is performed. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value being unintended by the game arcade from being set.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, a plurality of determination conditions of the selected probability setting value are prepared.

Probability setting value change processing
In the gaming machine of this modification, probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, a definite condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether a condition for fixing the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Fixed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the determination condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y) ) Clears the termination waiting flag (step S457), performs the processing of steps S412 to S415, and terminates the definite condition monitoring processing.

  That is, by performing the first operation in which the operator touches the operation handle 24, a first determination condition which is a condition on the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second determination condition as described later, and in this case, the second determination condition is satisfied because the first determination condition having the input from the touch switch as the condition is established. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end waiting flag is cleared.

  On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first determination condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second determined condition has already been started. If there is no end waiting flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

  If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the definite condition monitoring process is ended. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. If the setting key switch is off (step S452; Y), an initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and an end standby flag is set (step S454).

  Thereafter, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the definite condition monitoring process is ended. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing in step S457 and the subsequent steps is performed, and the fixed condition monitoring processing is ended. That is, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after an operation of turning off the setting key switch which makes the second operation is performed, the second determination condition is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

  As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition is satisfied is set as the probability setting value to be used for the game. The selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area until these determination conditions are satisfied, and the information of the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, when the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded, and the original probability setting value is set.

  In the probability setting value change state, it may be notified that the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24 is set. This notification may be performed constantly in the probability setting value change state, or may be performed only in the state in which the end standby flag is set. Further, the first determination condition and the second determination condition are not limited to the above-described conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second determination condition may be only that the setting key switch is turned off. Further, three or more determination conditions may be prepared, and the probability setting value selected by any one of the determination conditions may be set.

  Also, although the original probability setting value is set when the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the probability setting value change state being started, and the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied. May be set. The initial value in this case can be set to an arbitrary probability setting value in advance, for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (the game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the change switch 151), and the setting means is that one of a plurality of determination conditions is satisfied The selected probability setting value is set based on this. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability setting value. Further, by providing a plurality of finalization conditions, the degree of freedom of work is enhanced, and work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced.

  Further, the setting means is configured not to set the selected probability setting value when the power is shut off before any of the plurality of determination conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

  Further, the plurality of determination conditions include a first determination condition and a second determination condition, and the first determination condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second determination condition is the first operation and the second determination condition. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability setting value.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the setting means does not include the setting key operation unit and the setting key switch 152 is not provided. Also, the transition conditions to the changeable state where the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, if the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), whether the setting value change switch is turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier Is determined (step S61).

  When the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 in order to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure. When the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S61; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S62). As described later, in the transition determination processing, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and when the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. .

  If the probability setting value changing in progress flag is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the process of initializing the RAM and changing the set value to the probability setting value change state is shown in FIG. It transfers to step S35 of 6. In this modification, since the flag is set during the probability setting value change in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 may not be performed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N), the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

  On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25), whether the setting value change switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier Is determined (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S64; N), the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28) to prohibit RAM access. (Step S29), stop the control and wait for the shutoff of the power supply of the gaming machine.

  When the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S64; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as step S62. When the probability setting value changing in progress flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), in order to perform a process of changing the probability setting value to a process of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value. It transfers to step S35 of FIG. If the probability setting value change in progress flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Migration determination processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62 and S65) in the main process described above. In this transition determination processing, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether transition conditions are satisfied Step S73).

  In the present modification, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change state by having the attendant put the gaming balls in a predetermined order in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the gaming area 32 From the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input, it is determined whether this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination processing is ended. This will shift to the probability setting value change state.

  When the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), if the transition standby timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75) . Then, if the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored over a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  When the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process is ended. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is ended without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing of the RAM area for game control, and the backed up data is abnormal. In this case, the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

  The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game arcade. Also, although the game ball is put in the winning area in the predetermined order of the transition condition, the predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, only the detection by the detection means may be set as the condition, or the predetermined condition (the number of times of detection, the detection interval, etc.) may be set as the predetermined condition. .

  Further, although the detection sensor of the pay area is used as the detection means used to establish the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the setting value change switch 151 may be usable. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by detection means that the player can not freely operate during the game, such as a detection sensor of a winning area.

  Also, a plurality of dip switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and used as detection means used to satisfy transition conditions, and transition is made when the state of each dip switch is in a predetermined state A condition may be established. Alternatively, a keyboard may be provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by a password input from the keyboard. .

  Also, although the establishment of the transition condition is monitored to enable transition to the probability setting value change state only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the game machine is turned on, the power supply of the game machine is turned on. Even when the setting value change switch 151 is not turned on at the same time, establishment of the transition condition may be monitored to enable transition to the probability setting value changing state. In this case, a period for constantly monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be always set based on the power on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition if the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power on. A period may be started to monitor the formation of.

  From the above, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. Detection setting means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, special winning opening switch 38a) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned Setting means (game control apparatus 100) which can be selected from a plurality of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) And the setting means enables selection of the probability setting value when the detection means detects a predetermined mode.Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines capable of executing the task of changing the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the task of changing the probability setting value can be performed simultaneously with a plurality of gaming machines Improve.

  In addition, the game is executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, it is used in the game in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value The probability setting values to which a plurality of detection means (the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the special winning opening switch 38a) and the probability value used for lottery of the game are assigned are A setting unit (game control apparatus 100) that can select from among a plurality of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) According to another aspect of the present invention, the setting means enables the selection of the probability setting value when the plurality of detection means detect the predetermined mode. . Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines capable of executing the task of changing the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the task of changing the probability setting value can be performed simultaneously with a plurality of gaming machines Improve.

  The setting means enables the selection of the probability setting value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a fixed period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

  Also, the plurality of detection means can not be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the change of the probability setting value is performed by the setting value change operation unit configured by the dip switch.

  The dip switch forming the setting value change operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three dip switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as setting value change operation units, and the state of the dip switches corresponding to each probability setting value is defined.

Probability setting value change processing
In the gaming machine of the present modification, probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, it is determined whether the state of the setting value changing operation unit has changed (step S461), and when it has changed (step S461), the value of the working probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). Thus, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value change operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. It becomes.

  By using the dip switch in this way, the task of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and at the same time, the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. In addition, since the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided. Further, a cover covering the dip switch may be attachable so that the state of the dip switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

  Further, in order to make it easy to grasp the state of each dip switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each dip switch, and lighted when the corresponding dip switch is ON. In addition, the confirmation LED may be always turned on, or may be turned on only in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  Further, the setting value changing operation unit is not limited to the dip switch, and may be a toggle switch, a rotary switch, etc., as long as the probability setting value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. It is good.

  Also, although the probability setting value change state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152, transition to the probability setting value change state is enabled according to the state of the setting value change switch 151 as in the third modification described above. The probability setting value change state may be ended by the passage of. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value change operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value change operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

  In addition, when not in the probability setting value changing state, the monitoring setting process is performed to monitor whether the currently set probability setting value and the state of the setting value changing operation unit match and whether the two states match. Also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time, such as when the power is turned on or when the special view fluctuation display game is started. Also, it may be performed periodically at regular intervals. If it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, notification that abnormality has occurred may be issued, or the game may be stopped.

Fifth Modification
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine according to the present modification is configured not to play a game when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A for making it possible to change the probability setting value is broken. .

  In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, and a probability setting value display device 153 is provided, and the setting sub-board is connected to the game control apparatus 100. It is supposed to be. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control apparatus 100 through the connector 154. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the setting value change switch 151 here.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows the case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, so that the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the OFF state. Based on this, the probability setting value is not changed, and the game can be progressed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED is provided which serves as a confirmation means that enables the state of the setting key switch 152 to be visually recognized. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the off state.

  FIG. 43 (b) shows the case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is open and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

  As described above, the probability setting value is changed as long as the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 is the specific operation information input based on the operation of the operation unit to be in the specific state, and the input of the specific operation information is performed. It becomes a probability setting value change state in which selection of the probability setting value is possible. In this probability setting value change state, the game can not be progressed, and by ending the probability setting value change state, the game can progress.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is detached. In either case, the input to the CPU 111A is HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

  That is, since the same state as when the probability setting value is made changeable, the specific operation information is also input in this case. As a result, the probability setting value is changed and the game can not be progressed. As described above, since the specific operation information is input even when the disconnection or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding when the abnormality is present. In addition, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

  Although the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control apparatus 100 are connected by the connector 154 is given here, the setting key switch 152 may be directly connected without the connector 154. In addition, although the setting sub-board which constitutes the setting means having the setting key switch 152 etc. is provided separately from the game control apparatus 100, the setting key switch 152 etc. is provided in the game control apparatus 100 and the setting means May be integrated with the game control apparatus 100. In this case as well, it is possible to detect a disconnection or a connector omission between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A by the same configuration.

  Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is interrupted, but the connection is interrupted when the setting sub-substrate and the game control device 100 are interrupted. Information may be input. Also, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 etc. in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Operation control unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting the probability setting value connected to the control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control and the control unit and assigned a probability value to be used for lottery of the game Setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state Based on the input, the specific operation information is input to the control means to enable selection of the probability setting value, and the control means proceeds with the game when the specific operation information is input. It is configured not performed, if the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, so that the specific operation information to the control means has to be entered. Therefore, an act of changing the probability setting value illegally can be prevented in advance.

  Further, when the power is turned on in a state in which the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state, it is possible to select the probability setting value. Therefore, an act of changing the probability setting value illegally can be prevented in advance.

Sixth Modification
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the transition conditions to the probability setting value confirmation mode are different.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In the present modification, probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, if the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. If the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S434). If not on (step S434; N), the off state confirmation flag is set. Then (step S473), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. The off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch has been turned off in the state where the game is not in progress.

  Then, if the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether the off state confirmation flag is present (step S471). If the off-state confirmation flag is present (step S471; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), and the processes after step S435 are performed to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. On the other hand, when there is no off state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. That is, if the game is not in progress with the setting key switch in the on state during the game, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered and the setting key switch is turned off in the non-playing state. When it changes to the ON state, it shifts to probability setting value confirmation mode.

  In this way, by not transitioning to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is kept in the on state from during the game, it is intended during the game in the prohibition state in which the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode can not be made. If the setting key switch is turned on without being switched on, then it will be in a non-playing state (non-prohibited state), and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed by shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode . That is, it is possible to be in a state where the probability setting value can be confirmed only when operating with the intention to confirm the probability setting value.

  From the above, the setting unit (game control apparatus 100) operates the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) in a state where the state of the game controlled by the control unit (game control apparatus 100) is not prohibited. The confirmation state is set only when the state of is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being indicated unintentionally.

Seventh Modified Example
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification includes a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to the setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit and the setting value change button forming the second operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch for detecting the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control apparatus 100. Further, as with the setting key operation unit and the setting value changing button, the RAM clear button can not be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this main processing, when the RAM clear switch is in the on state (the state where the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. That is, the RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

Probability setting value change processing
Also, in place of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. In this probability setting value changing process, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the on state) (step S482; Y), the processing of step S412 and subsequent steps is performed to determine the selected probability setting value. Do.

  As described above, by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, the RAM 111C can be initialized, and the probability setting value can be determined by the RAM clear button. The work of determining the probability setting value can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, transition to the probability setting value change state and initialization of the RAM is performed, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed Since only the initialization of the RAM can be performed without transitioning to the state, when it is desired to perform only the initialization of the RAM, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch or transition to the probability setting value change state Instead, the work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced.

  From the above, the setting unit (game control apparatus 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch) Storage unit (RAM 111 C) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) is operated. ) Can be initialized. In addition, it is possible to determine the selected probability setting value by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)).

  In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in the gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state for giving the player the gaming value The first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)), the second operation unit (setting value) control means (game control apparatus 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned Setting means (game control device 100) which can be selected from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the change button (set value change switch 151) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) Memory means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for control of the game by the control means including the information of the probability setting value selected by the means and the front face of the gaming machine 10 covered and closed It has a main frame (front frame 12) that can be converted into a state and an open state, and opening / closing detection means (game control device 100) that can detect the open / close state of the main frame. The open / close detection means detects the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit is operated, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is made. Is initialized by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operation unit is operated, the probability setting value is set. This means that the storage means is initialized without making the change possible. Therefore, there is no need to change the probability setting value when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved.

  Further, the control means is detected by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the state where the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, The probability setting value can be changed and the storage unit is initialized. If the body frame is closed, the open / close detection unit detects it and the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the off state, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability setting value. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, the state can be shifted to the probability setting value change state, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, since the state does not shift to the probability setting value changing state even if the first operation unit is operated, it is possible to prevent the wrongdoing.

  In FIG. 45, by performing the state of the setting key switch prior to the confirmation of the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are simultaneously operated, the state shifts to the probability setting value change state. However, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the RAM clear switch is on may be used as the transition condition to the probability setting value changing state. By operating the plurality of operation units as a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability setting value change state.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment which does not have the RAM clear button, the open / close detection means detects that the main frame is in the open state, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and it is detected by the open / close detection means that the main frame is in the closed state, and When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the memory means is initialized without changing the probability setting value. It can be said that Also in this case, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be used as the transition condition to the probability setting value changing state.

  Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

  In FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be interchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing from step S407 is performed to change the selected probability setting value, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing from step S412 is performed. A process of determining the selected probability setting value may be performed.

Eighth Modified Example
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the operation of determining the probability setting value.

Probability setting value change processing
In this modification, in place of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, a probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed. In this probability setting value changing process, when the setting value changing switch is operated in the first input mode (step S 491; Y), the processes after step S 407 are performed to change the probability setting value to be selected. When the setting value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processing of step S412 and subsequent steps is performed to determine the selected probability setting value.

  The first input mode in this case is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is ended in less than a predetermined prescribed time, and the first input mode is present when the pressing is finished. It is determined to be. That is, the probability setting value is changed when the pressing operation is performed for a short time and the hand is released from the setting value changing button (when the setting value changing switch 151 is changed to the off state). The reason for taking the hand off the setting value change button is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

  The second input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is ended in a predetermined time or more, and the second input mode is present when the predetermined time passes. It is determined to be. That is, when there is a long-time pressing operation exceeding the specified time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more), the probability setting value is decided.

  As described above, the probability setting value can be selected and determined by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while pressing the setting value change button. The change of the set value, the confirmation and the clear of the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. The first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-described operations, and may be any operation as long as they can be determined.

  From the above, in the setting means (the game control apparatus 100), a predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) When the gaming machine is powered on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM 111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability setting value can be determined by operating a predetermined operation unit. It will be.

Ninth Modified Example
Next, a ninth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the transition conditions to the probability setting value confirmation mode are different.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In the present modification, probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended and the mode is not shifted to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  The predetermined abnormality can be set arbitrarily, but in this case, it is a magnet fraud, a board radio wave fraud, a frame radio wave fraud, a common electric power fraud, and a winning prize fraud. If any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent activities, and it is known to the person performing fraudulentness that probability setting values are known by preventing transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when such abnormalities occur. Can be prevented.

  In addition, although a switch abnormality due to the occurrence of a connector disconnection or the like, a chute ball out error, an overflow error, a dispensing abnormality error, and a glass frame opening error are not included in the predetermined abnormality, they may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, so that the game store side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. Thus, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known until the staff member confirms the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality.

  The security signal is output over a predetermined period also when initialization of the RAM 111C is performed or when the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, thereby prompting confirmation of the gaming machine. The external device of the gaming machine can grasp that the predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the fact that the security signal is output over the predetermined time.

  In addition, although the setting key switch is not switched to the probability setting value confirmation mode even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs. If all the predetermined abnormalities have been eliminated while the on state is maintained, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that time. By doing this, since it becomes possible to automatically check the probability setting value if all the predetermined abnormalities are eliminated, the efficiency of the confirmation operation can be improved.

  Also, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is made only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You may In this case, if the game is being played (step S433; Y) and if a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared.

  As described above, the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is prohibited by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is kept in the on state from the state where the predetermined abnormality occurs. When the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on in a state where a predetermined abnormality that is a state occurs, thereafter, all the predetermined abnormalities are eliminated (a state that is not a prohibited state), and the probability setting value is set. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed by shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, it is possible to be in a state where the probability setting value can be confirmed only when operating with the intention to confirm the probability setting value.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by the operation of the change switch 151), and the setting means is based on the operation unit being operated to be in a predetermined state If the state of the game controlled by the control means is in a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation unit is in a predetermined state where the probability setting value can be confirmed. Even in the state so that the was to avoid a confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience due to the indication of the probability setting value.

  Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, and the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine, and when any of the predetermined abnormalities occurs, the predetermined abnormality is This means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and to notify the outside that it is not possible to check the probability setting value, and the probability setting value is indicated. It is possible to prevent any inconvenience.

  In addition, storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game is provided, and the control means performs the specified external information over a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. It will be output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

  Further, in the setting means, the operating unit is brought into the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality occurs, and when all of the predetermined abnormality is resolved while being in the predetermined state, all the predetermined abnormality is eliminated. It will be made to be in a confirmation state based on Therefore, since it becomes possible to automatically check the probability setting value when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, the efficiency of the confirmation operation can be improved.

  Further, the setting means is in the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being indicated unintentionally.

Tenth Modification
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode even during a game.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, in place of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12, probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 49 is performed. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S511). If the game is not being played (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

  On the other hand, when the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. Thereby, even in the game, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and in the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game is interrupted.

  In addition, after performing the processing of step S442, it is determined whether there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. If there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, game resumption is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that has been interrupted is resumed with the end of the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  In the state in which the game is suspended, the display of the collective display device 50 may be erased once, or the state immediately before the suspension may be continued. In addition, when the game is interrupted during the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game or the common drawing fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. In addition, a display indicating that the batch display device 50 is in the interruption state may be displayed.

  In addition, when the game is interrupted, an interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is resumed, the restart command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the display device 41, voice, LED, etc. An effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed by the light emitting member or the movable role. Further, the display etc. on the display device 41 when restarting the game may be the same as the display etc. on the display device 41 at the time of the power failure recovery.

  Even when the game is being interrupted, winnings on the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the general winning opening 35 and the special fluctuation winning device 38 may be valid or invalid. Further, even during the interruption of the game, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

Eleventh Modification
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification is configured to output a voice accompanying the change of the probability setting value.

  FIG. 50 (a) shows an example of changing the probability setting value. Set the setting key switch to the on position by turning the setting key on the setting key operation section to the second position while the power to the gaming machine is in the off state (t11). The value is changed (t12). The command under probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 based on the setting value change state, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value change state is based on the reception of this command. Output the notification voice during change. As the notification sound during change, any sound may be used. For example, a sound such as "the probability setting value is being changed", a specific music or an alarm sound may be mentioned. In addition, it is notified that the probability setting value change state is also caused by the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44. Also good. For example, the display 41 may display "the probability setting value is being changed." That is, it is notified that it is a probability setting value change state using a rendering device used in the game. In this way, by notifying using the rendering device, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value change state is being made, and even if the probability setting value change state is illegally made during business, the clerk or the periphery of the game store It is possible for the player to notice and prevent an unauthorized game from being played.

  Then, when the setting key switch of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position and the setting key switch is turned off, the probability setting value change state ends (t13). Based on the end of the setting value change state, the game control device 100 transmits a command of termination of probability setting change to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 sets over a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command. The probability setting value notification voice for notifying information of the determined probability setting value is output (t13 to t14). Thereafter, a voice is output according to the state of the game (t14).

  Although any sound may be used as the probability setting value notification voice, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a sound corresponding to the set probability setting value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, a voice "probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, other sounds or specific music or alarm sounds may be used. Further, also in the display device 41, display according to the probability setting value set in the same manner is performed. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, a message "probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, display other than this may be used.

  Besides, the probability setting value is notified as the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44 according to the set probability setting value. You may do so. That is, the probability setting value is notified using a rendering device used in the game. In this way, by notifying using the rendering device, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game clerk or the surrounding game It is possible for a person to notice and prevent unauthorized gaming from taking place.

  When the probability setting value change state is set, external information indicating that the probability setting value change state is set is output, and the external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize the probability setting value change state. Also good. Also in the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is displayed is output, and the external apparatus (such as a hall computer) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. By doing this, it is possible for the gaming shop side to immediately grasp that the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode are in effect, and to prevent fraudulent acts in advance.

  In addition, the game may not be progressed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability setting value change state. Further, the probability setting value notification sound may be output over a period in which the progress of the game can not be performed. By doing this, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed in business, it is not possible to play the game immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally. In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the panel decoration device 46, and the panel effect device indicate that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect. The notification may be made by a rendering device such as 44.

  Further, in the probability setting value change state, voice may be output according to the probability setting value updated each time the probability setting value is updated by an operation. In addition, the probability setting value after updating may be notified in correspondence with the updating of the probability setting value in the same manner in other rendering devices. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value A control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, and a setting unit (game control capable of selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for drawing a game is assigned, from plural types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit The apparatus 100) and a rendering device (speakers 19a and 19b, display device 41, sub information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, panel decoration device 46, The probability setting value can be notified by the rendering device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent cheating in advance. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability setting value can be confirmed.

  In addition, after the probability setting value change state ends, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed in business, it is not possible to play the game immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as that of the above-described gaming machine of the first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration.
The gaming machine according to the second embodiment differs from the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in that the gaming machine according to the second embodiment includes a drying unit that removes moisture attached to the gaming balls.

As a result of intensive studies, the inventors of the present invention have found that the rolling speed of the gaming ball changes due to the humidity (strictly speaking, the moisture adhering to the gaming ball) and the change of the rolling speed of the gaming ball causes the winning slump It has been found that it is one of the factors (that is, the factor that it is not possible to stably achieve the winning rate as designed).
The rolling speed of the gaming ball changes due to changes in the environment such as temperature, humidity, volume surrounding the gaming ball, or external factors such as resin or rubber that the gaming ball directly touches. For example, in the case where a shelf made of resin is provided near a winning opening (a starting winning opening or a big winning opening), the rolling speed at which the gaming ball rolls on the shelf changes. In some cases, a winning slump to the winning opening may occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, attention was paid to environmental differences that affect winning, in particular, humidity (water strictly adhering to the gaming balls) that greatly affects the rolling speed of the gaming balls. Specifically, focusing on the tribological phenomenon that the coefficient of friction tends to decrease as the humidity rises, the drying means for removing the water adhering to the gaming ball is provided, and the rolling speed of the gaming ball is made uniform. A gaming machine which is not affected by environmental changes, that is, a gaming machine capable of approximating gaming performance (such as winning rate) to original design values and data, and maintaining the approximated state is proposed.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a blower / dryer 600 as a drying unit for removing water attached to the gaming balls is disposed in the upper tray unit 210.
For example, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper tray unit 210 having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).
The upper tray unit 210 further includes a rendering operation device that receives an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device that performs light emission rendering and the like according to the gaming state. .

The effect operating device is an operating device in which the touch panel 29 is incorporated in the effect button 25 and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit 210 so that the player can easily operate it.
The ball lending operating device is an operating device operated when the player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit 210. The ball lending operating device includes a ball lending button 27, a discharge button 28, and a balance display unit (not shown). The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the ejection button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.
The decoration device accommodates an illumination member such as an LED, etc., and is a device that performs light emission effects and the like according to the game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper tray unit 210. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 provided with the upper tray unit 210 and the like, and at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball emitting device (not shown) A lower tray unit 230 having a tray 23 is provided.
The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19 b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the gaming board 30.
The lower tray unit 230 is disposed below the upper tray unit 210 at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit 210. The lower plate 23 has a ball removing hole penetrating the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an open / close operation unit for opening and closing the ball removing hole. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit to open the ball releasing hole, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole.

FIG. 51 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and is a view showing an example of the arrangement location of the blower and dryer 600. As shown in FIG. FIG. 52 (a) is a view for explaining an example of the blower and dryer 600, and is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper tray unit 210 and the lower tray 23. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 52 (a), illustration of the rendering operation device, the ball lending operation device, and the decoration device is omitted.
For example, as shown in FIG. 51, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a blower / drying device 600 for drying the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 23. The blower drying device 600 is built in the upper tray unit 210, and for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, an upper tray side dehumidifying unit disposed above the blower unit 610 such as a fan and the blower unit 610. 620A and a lower plate dehumidifying part 620B disposed below the blower part 610.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, a plurality of upper holes 211 which are circular holes communicating the inside and the outside of the upper tray unit 210 are provided in the upper tray 21 of the housing of the upper tray unit 210. It is done. The shape and size of the upper hole 211 may be any shape and size as long as the game ball can not be fitted or passed through, but the shape and size do not inhibit the flow of the game ball from the upper tray 21 to the ball launching device Is preferred. Specifically, for example, when the upper hole 211 is a circular hole as in the present embodiment, the diameter of the upper hole 211 is preferably 1/2 or less of the diameter of the gaming ball, and the diameter of the gaming ball is 1/5 or less is more preferable, and 1/10 or less of the diameter of a game ball is further more preferable.
Further, in the portion of the casing of the upper tray unit 210 facing the lower tray 23, a plurality of lower holes 212, which are circular holes communicating the inside and the outside of the upper tray unit 210, are provided. Although the shape and size of the lower hole 212 are arbitrary, it is preferable that the shape and size be such that the game ball can not be fitted or passed through.

  The blower unit 610 is disposed inside the upper tray unit 210 with the blowout port 611 facing upward and the suction port 612 facing downward. Therefore, the lower hole 212 of the upper tray unit 210 functions as an air inlet, and the upper hole 211 of the upper tray unit 210 functions as an exhaust port. That is, air in the outside of the upper tray unit 210 is forcibly sucked into the upper tray unit 210 through the lower hole 212 by the operation of the blower unit 610, and the upper tray unit 210 through the upper hole 211. Internal air is forcibly exhausted to the outside of the upper tray unit 210. As described above, since the blower dryer 600 can forcibly ventilate the inside of the upper tray 21 and the inside of the lower tray 23, the humidity in the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 23 can be reduced. It is possible to promote the evaporation of the water adhering to the gaming balls in the inner and lower trays 23. In addition, since air can be blown to the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21, water adhering to the gaming balls in the upper tray 21 can be forcibly removed.

  The game control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to control ON / OFF of the blower unit 610 according to the current game state or the like. The device for controlling the ON / OFF of the blower unit 610 is not limited to the game control device 100 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300 controls the ON / OFF of the blower unit 610 It is good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the upper tray side dehumidifying part 620A includes a dehumidifying sheet 621 and a resin case 622 for containing the dehumidifying sheet 621. Similarly, the lower tray dehumidifying part 620B is also configured to include a dehumidifying sheet 621 and a resin case 622 for storing the dehumidifying sheet 621.
The dehumidifying sheet 621 is a hygroscopic (water absorbing) and breathable sheet member, and is, for example, a breathable filter including a hygroscopic component. Further, a plurality of through holes 622 a are provided in the upper surface portion (top surface portion) and the lower surface portion (bottom surface portion) of the resin case 622 respectively. Therefore, the blower drying apparatus 600 can keep the humidity in the upper tray 21 low mainly by the upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A even when the blowing unit 610 is not operating, and the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B mainly The humidity in the lower plate 23 can be kept low. Furthermore, the moisture removal effect (dehumidification effect) of the upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B can be enhanced by the operation of the blower unit 610.

  Specifically, by the operation of the blower unit 610, air outside the resin case 622 is forcibly sucked into the resin case 622 through the through holes 622a provided in the lower surface portion of the resin case 622, After the sucked air passes through the dehumidifying sheet 621, it is forcibly discharged to the outside of the resin case 622 through the through holes 622 a provided in the upper surface portion of the resin case 622. That is, the blower / dryer 600 sucks air (for example, damp air) by the operation of the blower 610, and the air is reduced to the dry air by the upper dish dehumidifier 620A and the lower dish dehumidifier 620B. It can be blown out after conversion. As described above, since the blower dryer 600 can ventilate the inside of the upper tray 21 and the inside of the lower tray 23 with the drying air, the humidity in the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 23 can be efficiently reduced. In addition, since dry air can be blown to the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21, the water adhering to the gaming balls in the upper tray 21 can be efficiently removed.

FIG. 52 (b) is a view for explaining an example of the blower drying device 600 and is a schematic cross-sectional view of the resin case 622.
The upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B are detachably disposed in the upper tray unit 210. Therefore, the entire upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A can be replaced, or the entire lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B can be replaced.
Furthermore, in the case of the present embodiment, the upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B can also replace only the dehumidifying sheet 621. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, the resin case 622 is composed of a case main body 623 whose upper surface is open and a lid 624 which closes the upper surface opening of the case main body 623. A pair of guide grooves 623a is formed at the upper end portion of the case main body 623. The lid 624 can be attached to and detached from the case main body 623 by sliding along the guide grooves 623a. Therefore, only the dehumidifying sheet 621 can be replaced by taking out the upper tray side dehumidifying part 620A and the lower tray side dehumidifying part 620B from the upper tray unit 210 and opening and closing the lid 624.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52A, for example, two dehumidifying sheets 621 are used for the upper dish side dehumidifying part 620A, while for the lower pan side dehumidifying part 620B. A single dehumidifying sheet 621 is used. Therefore, the maximum water absorption amount (saturated water absorption amount) of the upper plate side dehumidifying part 620A is twice the maximum water absorption amount (saturated water absorption amount) of the lower plate side dehumidifying part 620B.
Since the game balls to be shot immediately after are stored in the upper tray 21, in order to realize a stable winning rate at all times, it is more preferable than the removal of water adhering to the game balls in the lower tray 23, It is preferable to give priority to the removal of the water adhering to the game balls in the upper tray 21. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum water absorption amount of the upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A is larger than the maximum water absorption amount of the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B, so that the water adhering to the gaming balls in the upper plate 21 is assured Removal can be continued over a long period of time.

In the present embodiment, the maximum water absorption amount of the dehumidifying part is adjusted according to the number of the dehumidifying sheets 621, but the adjustment method of the maximum water absorption amount of the dehumidifying part is not limited to this. For example, the upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B have the same number of dehumidifying sheets, and the lower tray dehumidifying unit 620B uses a first dehumidifying sheet, and the upper tray dehumidifying unit 620A performs first dehumidification A second dehumidifying sheet having a larger maximum water absorption amount than the sheet (for example, a second dehumidifying sheet having a hygroscopic component content more than the first dehumidifying sheet) may be used.
Further, from the viewpoint of removing the water adhering to the gaming balls in the upper tray 21 reliably and at high speed, etc., the moisture absorption efficiency of the upper plate side dehumidifying portion 620A is higher than the moisture absorption efficiency of the lower plate side dehumidifying portion 620B. It may be configured to be high. For example, the upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B have the same number of dehumidifying sheets, and the lower tray dehumidifying unit 620B uses a first dehumidifying sheet, and the upper tray dehumidifying unit 620A performs first dehumidification A second dehumidifying sheet having a higher hygroscopic efficiency than the sheet (for example, a second dehumidifying sheet made of a material having a higher hygroscopic efficiency than the first dehumidifying sheet, a second containing a component having a higher hygroscopic efficiency than the first dehumidifying sheet A dehumidifying sheet) may be used.
In addition, the blower / dryer 600 may be provided not in the upper tray unit 210 but in the back flow passage of the gaming machine 10 (see a first modified example (described later) of the second embodiment).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the upper tray 21 storing the gaming balls to be launched to the gaming area 32, the blower means (the blower unit) capable of blowing air to the upper tray 21 A plurality of air outlets (upper holes 211) to which the game ball can not pass are provided in the upper plate 21 so that the wind from the air blowing means is sent to the outside through the air outlets.
Therefore, the inside of the upper tray 21 can be forcedly ventilated to lower the humidity in the upper tray 21, and air is blown to the gaming balls in the upper tray 21 to force the water adhering to the gaming balls. The rolling speed of the gaming ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.
Furthermore, since the wind is sent from the upper tray 21, the front of the gaming machine 10 can also be ventilated. That is, since the space between the gaming machine 10 and the player can be ventilated, the player can play comfortably.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes the upper tray 21 having the upper tray 21 and the upper tray unit 210 including the blower (the blower 610), and the dehumidifying unit (upper tray side) is provided inside the upper tray 210. A dehumidifying unit 620A and a lower plate dehumidifying unit 620B may be provided so that the air from the air blowing means is sent to the outside through the air blowing port (upper hole 211) after passing through the dehumidifying means. .
By configuring in this manner, the inside of the upper tray 21 can be ventilated with dry air, so the humidity in the upper tray 21 can be efficiently reduced. In addition, since dry air can be blown to the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21, the water adhering to the gaming balls in the upper tray 21 can be efficiently removed.

For example, as shown to FIG. 53A (a), the lower hole 212 may be provided in the part which does not oppose the lower plate 23 among the housings of the upper plate unit 210. As shown in FIG.
For example, as shown to FIG. 53A (b), the ventilation drying apparatus 600 may be provided with only one among the upper-dish dehumidification part 620A and the lower-dish dehumidification part 620B. In addition, the blower drying device 600 may be provided with only one of the blower unit and the dehumidifying unit.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 53B (a), the upper hole 211 is an inlet of the ball guiding passage 79a for guiding the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 21 to the ball launching device (the upper plate 21 of the ball guiding passage 79a It may be provided in the vicinity of the side end). In that case, since the wind can be locally applied to a portion close to the ball launcher in the inside of the upper tray 21, it is necessary to remove the water adhering to the game ball and then to fire the game ball Period can be shortened. By reducing the time period between removing the water adhering to the game ball and firing the game ball, the possibility of reattachment of the water to the game ball is reduced, so the winning rate according to the design value Can be realized more stably.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the upper hole 211 is provided on the bottom surface of the upper plate 21 so as to be orthogonal to the bottom surface, but the penetrating direction of the upper hole 211 is orthogonal to the bottom surface For example, the direction may be oblique to the bottom surface.
Further, the upper hole 211 may be provided not on the bottom surface of the upper tray 21 but on the side surface of the upper tray 21 in addition to (or in place of) the bottom surface of the upper tray 21. When the upper hole 211 is provided in the side surface of the upper plate 21, the penetration direction of the upper hole 211 may be orthogonal to the side surface or may be oblique to the side surface. good.

The distance between the upper holes 211 (the distance from the center of one upper hole 211 to the center of the upper hole 211 adjacent to the one upper hole 211) is preferably less than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thus, even if one upper hole 211 is blocked by the game ball (that is, even if the game ball rests on one upper hole 211), the upper hole 211 adjacent to the one upper hole 211 is the game ball Since the upper plate 21 can not be closed off, dehumidification in the upper plate 21 can be effectively performed.
In addition, the diameter of one end (the end on the outer side) of the upper hole 211 and the diameter of the other end (the end on the inner side) may not be the same. When the diameter of one end of the upper hole 211 is different from the diameter of the other end, the above-mentioned "shape and size of the upper hole 211" is the end on the side that can contact the game ball, that is, one end of the upper hole 211 It refers to the shape and size of the (outside end). Similarly, the diameter of one end (the end on the outer side) of the lower hole 212 and the diameter of the other end (the end on the inner side) may not be the same.
Further, the shapes of the upper hole 211 and the lower hole 212 are not limited to the circular shape, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the shape of the upper hole 211 may be a shape that tapers in the flow direction of the gaming ball as shown in, for example, FIGS. 53B (b) and (c), or as shown in FIG. The shape may be elongated in the flow direction of the game ball. When the shape of the upper hole 211 is a shape as shown in FIG. 53B (b) to (d), the upper hole 211 not only does not inhibit the flow of the gaming balls but also allows the gaming balls to flow smoothly to the ball launching device. It becomes possible to guide by.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the dehumidifying unit (upper dish dehumidifying unit 620A, lower dish dehumidifying unit 620B) can be configured to be at least made of the dehumidifying sheet 621.
With such a configuration, the ease of handling the dehumidifying means is improved.
The configurations of the upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B can be changed as appropriate. For example, the upper dish-side dehumidifying part 620A and the lower dish-side dehumidifying part 620B are, for example, dehumidifying sheet 621, that is, a granular hygroscopic agent such as silica gel instead of (or in addition to) a sheet-like hygroscopic agent. It is good. The upper dish dehumidifying part 620A and the lower dish dehumidifying part 620B can also be configured to include a deodorant in addition to the moisture absorbent such as the dehumidifying sheet 621, for example. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to remove odors (such as the smell of cigarettes) in the game arcade. In addition, the upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B may not be provided with the resin case 622, and may be made only of, for example, a hygroscopic agent (dehumidifying sheet 621 or the like).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the dehumidifying means (upper tray side dehumidifying unit 620A, lower tray side dehumidifying unit 620B) is configured to be detachably disposed in the upper tray unit 210. Can.
With this configuration, the entire dehumidifying unit (upper dish dehumidifying unit 620A, lower dish dehumidifying unit 620B) may be replaced, or only the hygroscopic agent (dehumidifying sheet 621 or the like) of the dehumidifying unit may be replaced. it can.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the upper tray unit 210 having the upper tray 21 for storing gaming balls to be launched to the gaming area 32, and the lower tray 23 disposed below the upper tray unit 210. In the gaming machine provided with the above, the air blowing means (air blowing portion 610) is disposed inside the upper plate unit 210, and the upper plate 21 is an upper hole 211 which is a hole communicating the inside and the outside of the upper plate unit 210. And a plurality of lower holes 212, which are holes communicating the inside and the outside of the upper tray unit 210, in the portion facing the lower tray 23 of the upper tray unit 210, and the suction port 612 and the outlet of the blower One of the holes 611 faces the upper hole 211, and the other of the suction port 612 and the air outlet 611 faces the lower hole 212.
Therefore, the inside of the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 23 can be forcedly ventilated to lower the humidity in the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 23, and the gaming balls in the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 can be aired. Since it is possible to forcibly remove the water adhering to the gaming ball by spraying the, the rolling speed of the gaming ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.
Furthermore, since the wind is sent from the upper tray unit 210, the front of the gaming machine 10 can also be ventilated. That is, since the space between the gaming machine 10 and the player can be ventilated, the player can play comfortably.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the blowout port 611 can be configured to face the upper hole 211 and the suction port 612 can be oriented to the lower hole 212.
By configuring in this manner, air is blown to the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21, that is, the gaming balls that are launched immediately after the game area 32, and the water adhering to the gaming balls is compulsorily forced. It can be removed. In addition, since the suction port 612 is directed downward, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of sucking in dust, dirt and the like.
In addition, it is also possible to comprise so that the blower outlet 611 may face the lower hole 212 side, and the suction inlet 612 may face the upper hole 211 side. That is, the upper hole 211 of the upper tray unit 210 may function as an intake port, and the lower hole 212 of the upper tray unit 210 may function as an exhaust port.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the upper dish dehumidifying means (upper dish side dehumidifying part 620A) is inside the upper dish unit 210 and between the air blowing means (air blowing portion 610) and the upper hole 211. And the lower plate side dehumidifying means (lower plate side dehumidifying part 620B) is disposed between the air blowing means and the lower hole 212, and the upper plate side dehumidifying means is disposed. Can be configured such that the maximum water absorption amount (saturated water absorption amount) is larger than that on the lower plate side dehumidifying means.
By configuring in this manner, reliable removal of water adhering to the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21, that is, the gaming balls to be fired immediately in the gaming area 32 is continued for a long period of time be able to.

The maximum water absorption amount of the upper plate side dehumidifying means (upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A) may be the same as the maximum water absorption amount of the lower plate side dehumidifying means (lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B), or the lower plate side It may be smaller than the maximum water absorption amount of the dehumidifying means (lower plate dehumidifying part 620B).
In addition, the through holes 622a of the upper plate side dehumidifying part 620A may be provided to face the upper holes 211 of the upper plate unit 210 (that is, the through holes 622a are disposed immediately below the upper holes 211). In that case, since the air from the through hole 622a directly enters the upper hole 211 immediately above the through hole 622a, dehumidification in the upper plate 21 can be performed more effectively.
The through hole 622a of the lower plate dehumidifying part 620B may be provided to face the lower hole 212 of the upper plate unit 210 (that is, the through hole 622a may be disposed immediately above the lower hole 212). In that case, since the air from the lower hole 212 directly enters the through hole 622a immediately above the lower hole 212, dehumidification in the lower plate 23 can be more effectively performed.

First Modification
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, a heating and drying apparatus 700 as a drying unit for removing moisture attached to the gaming balls is disposed on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 54 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, and is a view showing an example of the arrangement location of the heating and drying apparatus 700. As shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 54, an external information terminal for outputting information to the outside (for example, a symbol determination signal, a big hit signal, a probability variation signal, a prize ball signal, a rental ball signal, etc.) A plate 71 and a storage tank 72 for storing gaming balls before being paid out are provided.
Further, at the bottom of the storage tank 72, there is connected a chute 73 which has a gentle inclination and guides the gaming ball toward one side of the gaming machine 10. At the end of the chute 73, a curved flow path device 74 is connected which converts the flow direction of the gaming ball from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction.
A ball dispensing device (dispensing unit) 75 having a drive source is disposed at the lower end of the bending flow path device 74, and the ball dispensing device 75 is configured to be able to dispense a predetermined number of gaming balls. The outlet of the ball dispenser 75 is connected to an upstream portion forming member 76 that forms an upstream portion of the upper tray guiding flow path for guiding the gaming balls dispensed by the ball dispenser 75 to the upper tray 21. In the present modification, the heating and drying apparatus 700 is mounted on the upstream portion forming member 76. That is, the upstream rear flow passage (the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow passage device through which the game ball before being dispensed by the ball dispensing device 75 passes through the rear flow passage disposed on the rear surface side of the gaming machine 10) And a downstream rear flow passage (a flow passage formed by the upstream portion forming member 76) through which the game ball after being dispensed by the ball dispensing device 75 passes, and the present deformation In the example, the heating and drying apparatus 700 is disposed in the downstream back flow channel.
Further, the downstream portion of the bending flow path device 74, the ball dispensing device 75, the upstream portion forming member 76, and the heating and drying device 700 are covered from behind by a protective cover 77.

Furthermore, in the central part of the back of the front frame 12, there is a game control for overall control of various devices such as the presentation control device 300 for controlling the presentation of the variable display game in the display device 41 (image display device) An apparatus 100, etc. are provided.
In the lower part of the back of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 for controlling the ball payout device 75, a card unit relay board 78 for relaying signals transmitted and received between the gaming machine 10 and the card unit, game control A power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices such as the device 100 is provided.

FIG. 55 (a) is a view for explaining an example of the heating and drying apparatus 700. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 54, the gaming machine 10 of this modification is a heating and drying apparatus 700 for drying gaming balls passing through the inside of the upstream portion forming member 76 (that is, the upstream portion of the upper plate induction channel). Is equipped. The heating and drying apparatus 700 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear surface portion (rear surface portion) of the upstream portion forming member 76. For example, as shown in FIG. 55A, the temperature of the heating portion 710 such as a heater and the temperature of the heating portion 710 Temperature adjusting portion 720 for adjusting the temperature, a thermally conductive metal plate 730 disposed between the heating portion 710 and the upstream portion forming member 76, and a portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 facing the thermally conductive metal plate 730. And a back channel wall 740 disposed on the

  The temperature adjustment unit 720 is, for example, a temperature overheat prevention device that prevents the temperature rise of the heating unit 710. Specifically, for example, the temperature adjustment unit 720 measures the temperature of the heating unit 710 by the temperature measurement unit, and switches the heating unit 710 to the normal power mode when the temperature of the heating unit 710 falls below a predetermined temperature range. Control is performed, and when the temperature of the heating unit 710 exceeds a predetermined temperature range, control to switch the heating unit 710 to a low power mode with lower power consumption than the normal power mode (or off mode in which power supply is not performed) Control) is configured to be performed.

  In addition, the temperature control method of the heating part 710 by the temperature control part 720 can be changed suitably. The temperature adjustment unit 720 measures, for example, the time after the heating unit 710 is switched to the low power mode (or the off mode) by the time measuring unit (timer) and the time after switching to the normal power mode. Performs control to switch the heating unit 710 to the normal power mode when the time after the switch to the low power mode (or the off mode) reaches a predetermined first time, and after the heating unit 710 switches to the normal power mode The control unit may be configured to perform control to switch the heating unit 710 to the low power mode (or the off mode) when the time of has reached a predetermined second time.

  In addition, the temperature adjustment unit 720 may be configured to perform control to switch the mode of the heating unit 710 according to, for example, a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before being paid out). In addition, the temperature adjustment unit 720 may be configured to perform control to switch the mode of the heating unit 710 according to, for example, a gaming state (for example, a gaming state in which a lot of game balls are paid out and a few gaming states). In addition, for example, a switch is provided to detect that the ball release lever (the lever operated when removing the game ball from the back flow path) provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 is provided, and the temperature adjustment unit 720 May be configured to perform control to switch the mode of the heating unit 710 in accordance with a signal from the switch.

  In addition, the game control device 100 of the present modification is configured to control ON / OFF of the heating unit 710 in accordance with the payout operation of the ball payout device 75. Specifically, for example, control is performed such that the heating unit 710 is turned on when the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device 75 starts, and the heating unit 710 is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed after the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device 75 is finished. I do. The device for controlling ON / OFF of the heating unit 710 is not limited to the game control device 100 and can be appropriately changed. For example, ON / OFF of the heating unit 710 is controlled by the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300 It is good.

The heat conductive metal plate 730 is an aluminum plate, an iron plate or the like, and the heat from the heating unit 710 is substantially uniformly applied to a predetermined portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 (portion provided with the back flow passage wall 740). The heat transfer is performed, and heat is efficiently transferred to a targeted portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 (a portion where the back flow passage wall 740 is provided).
When the heat conductive metal plate 730 is not disposed between the heating portion 710 and the upstream portion forming member 76, a specific portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 (for example, a portion facing the heating element of the heating portion 710) Is likely to be hotter than the other parts. Therefore, in this modification, in order to prevent the upstream portion forming member 76 from being partially in a high temperature state, the heat from the heating portion 710 is homogenized by the heat conductive metal plate 730 before the upstream portion forming member 76. I am trying to give it to you.
Moreover, since the heating and drying apparatus 700 includes the heat conductive metal plate 730, the degree of freedom in the selection of the heating unit 710 is high. That is, even if the shape or size of the heating portion 710 does not fit the upstream portion forming member 76, if the shape or size of the thermally conductive metal plate 730 matches the upstream portion forming member 76, the thermally conductive metal plate By the heat treatment 730, the heat from the heating unit 710 can be transferred to the upstream portion forming member 76 substantially uniformly and efficiently.

  The back flow passage wall 740 is a plate-like member provided with a plurality of through holes (heat radiation ports), and is made of a thermosetting resin so as not to be deformed or damaged by the heat from the heating unit 710. The shape and size of the through holes (heat radiation ports) provided in the back flow path wall 740 are arbitrary as long as the game balls can not be fitted or passed through, but any shape or size can be used in the upstream portion forming member 76. It is preferable that the shape and size do not inhibit the flow of gaming balls. Specifically, for example, when the through hole (heat dissipation port) is a circular hole, the diameter of the through hole (heat dissipation port) is preferably 1/2 or less of the diameter of the gaming ball, and the diameter of the gaming ball 1/5 or less of is more preferable.

In this modification, the through hole (heat dissipation port) is provided in the back flow passage wall 740 so as to be orthogonal to the back flow passage wall 740, but the penetration direction of the through hole is the back flow passage The direction is not limited to the direction orthogonal to the wall 740 and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the direction may be oblique to the back flow passage wall 740.
Further, in this modification, only the portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 facing the heat conductive metal plate 730 (that is, only the back flow path wall 740) is formed of thermosetting resin, and the other portions of the upstream portion forming member 76 However, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire upstream portion forming member 76 is formed of a thermosetting resin, and a through hole (heat radiation port) is formed in a portion facing the heat conductive metal plate 730. You may make it provide two or more.

Further, the heating and drying apparatus 700 may be provided with a plurality of heating units 710, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), for example. Since the heating and drying apparatus 700 includes the heat conductive metal plate 730, the heat from the plurality of heating units 710 can be equalized by the heat conductive metal plate 730 and then applied to the upstream portion forming member 76. When a plurality of heating units 710 are provided, a temperature adjustment unit 720 may be provided for each of the plurality of heating units 710 as shown in FIG. A temperature adjustment unit 720 may be provided.
Further, the shape of the heat conductive metal plate 730 may be a shape that covers not only the rear surface of the upstream portion forming member 76 but also the side surface of the upstream portion forming member 76.

  Further, the heating and drying device 700 is not a downstream rear flow passage (a flow passage formed by the upstream portion forming member 76) through which the game ball after being paid out by the ball discharging device 75 passes, for example, the ball discharging device 75 Alternatively, it may be provided in an upstream rear flow passage (a flow passage formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow passage device 74) through which the game ball before being paid out passes. Specifically, the heating and drying device 700 may be mounted on the outer surface of the storage tank 72, or the heating and drying device 700 may be mounted on the outer surface of the chute 73 as shown in FIG. 56, for example. The heating and drying device 700 may be mounted on the outer surface of the device 74. Alternatively, the heating and drying device 700 may be attached from the storage tank 72 to the chute 73, or the heating and drying device 700 may be attached from the chute 73 to the bending flow path device 74. The heating and drying device 700 may be attached to the bending flow path device 74 through the chute 73.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first modified example of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the ball payout device 75 for paying out the gaming balls based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, Heating means (heating unit 710) for heating the back flow path for guiding the game ball on the back side, and heat transfer means (heat conductive metal plate 730) for transferring the heat from the heating means to the back flow path And a rear flow path wall 740 having a heat release port (through hole) through which the game ball can not pass and forming a part of the rear flow path.
Therefore, since the water adhering to the gaming ball passing through the back flow passage can be forcibly removed by heat, the rolling speed of the gaming ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.
The heat conductive metal plate 730 may be in contact with the motor of the ball dispenser 75. In that case, not only the heat generated by the heating unit 710 but also the heat generated by the motor can be transferred to the back flow passage, so that the back flow passage can be warmed at a higher speed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first modified example of the second embodiment, the back flow path heated by the heating means (heating unit 710) is a flow path through which the game balls paid out from the ball payout device 75 pass (downstream back surface A flow path, that is, a flow path formed by the upstream portion forming member 76 (see FIG. 54), can be configured to turn ON / OFF the heating means in accordance with the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device 75.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to forcibly remove the water adhering to the gaming balls after being dispensed by the ball dispensing device 75 by heat. Further, since the heating means (heating unit 710) is turned ON / OFF in accordance with the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device 75, it is possible to suppress unnecessary power consumption.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first modified example of the second embodiment, the back flow passage heated by the heating means (the heating unit 710) is a flow passage (upstream back flow passage) guiding the game ball to the ball payout device 75 That is, it can be configured to be a flow path formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow path device 74 (see FIG. 56).
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to forcibly remove the water adhering to the gaming balls before being dispensed by the ball dispensing device 75 by heat.

In the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment and each modification, the special variation winning device 38 is replaced with the door 38c in the form of an attacker, for example, as shown in FIG. You may provide the opening / closing door (slide door) 38c which opens and closes the opening 38d. Further, in this case, as shown in FIG. 57, for example, the special variation winning device 38 has an effect switch (upstream switch 381 and downstream switch) for measuring the time during which the game ball flows down on the open / close door (slide door) 38c. 382).
As described above, since the use environment (temperature, humidity, etc., in particular, humidity) of the gaming machine greatly affects the rolling speed of the gaming ball, the time taken for the gaming ball to flow down the shelf (opening and closing door 38c) is measured It is possible to guess the use environment of the game ball by doing.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the open / close door 38c is in the open state, the gaming ball having entered the special variation winning device 38 is detected by the upstream switch 381, It flows into the special winning opening 38 d, is detected by the special winning opening switch 38 a, and is discharged from the game area 32.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), when the open / close door 38c is in the closed state, the gaming ball having entered the special variation winning device 38 is detected by the upstream switch 381, and then the open / close door 38c. It flows down (rolls up), is detected by the downstream switch 382, and returns to the game area 32.
The upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382 are connected to the effect control device 300. Although not shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the special variation winning device 38 has a front cover, and the front of the front cover is close to the back of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15. It is arranged that the game ball does not flow down the front of the front.

  The effect control device 300 calculates, for example, the time taken for one gaming ball to pass through the upstream switch 381 to pass through the downstream switch 382 based on detection signals from the upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382, The calculated time is compared with a preset reference value to determine the corresponding level value. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 57C, when the difference between the calculated time (measurement value) and the reference value is −5% or more and less than 5% (that is, within the reference range), the level value It is determined that "3".

  In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the level value notification image for notifying the determined level value, that is, the level value notification image of the display mode according to the determined level value, on the display device 41 every predetermined time or every predetermined number of determinations. indicate. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the level value is “3”, as shown in FIG. 57C, for example, a yellow level value notification image (for example, an image in which a petal simulates a yellow flower) is displayed. indicate. Note that the level value notification image is not limited to an image that imitates a flower, and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a meter image or the like that displays a level value.

The player checks the level value notification image to estimate whether the winning rate is as designed, or more advantageous than the designed value, or more disadvantageous than the designed value. Can.
In addition, the salesperson of the game arcade can maintain the original performance of the gaming machine by checking the level value notification image and performing measures such as adjusting the air conditioning in the store if the measured value is not within the reference range. It becomes.

The reference value may be constant throughout the year, or may be changed seasonally using the RTC 338.
Alternatively, a plurality of level value notification images may be displayed to display the transition of the level value. In this case, the level value notification image may be added every predetermined time or every predetermined number of determinations, and sequentially deleted from the old level value notification image.
In addition, when the previous level value and the current level value change by a predetermined level (for example, two levels) or more, the effect control device 300 determines an error, invalidates the current level, and notifies an error notification. You may go.
Further, instead of (or in addition to) the level value notification image, the use environment (temperature, humidity, etc.) of the gaming machine estimated based on the calculated time (measurement value) may be notified.

Further, the upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382 may be connected to the game control apparatus 100.
In this case, the game control device 100 may determine the level value based on detection signals from the upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382 and notify the effect control device 300 of the level value. The timing at which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of the level value can be appropriately selected. For example, the level value may be notified every predetermined time or every predetermined number of determinations, or a change of the level occurs. The level value may be notified at the time of the occurrence.
Further, in this case, the game control device 100 may determine the level value based on the detection signals from the upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382 and notify the external device via the external information terminal board 71. The timing at which the game control apparatus 100 notifies the external device of the level value via the external information terminal board 71 can be appropriately selected. For example, the level value may be notified every predetermined time or every predetermined number of determinations. The level value may be notified when a change in the level value occurs. By notifying the external device of the level value, for example, the external device can be configured to count the level values and automatically control the in-store air conditioning to maintain the original performance of the gaming machine.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, a blowing effect drying apparatus 800 as a drying means for removing the water adhering to the game balls is disposed in the lower tray unit 230. The air blowing effect drying device 800 functions as an air blowing drying device that removes moisture attached to the game balls by air and also functions as an air blowing effect device that performs air blowing effects that send a wind recognizable to the player toward the player. Do.

FIG. 58 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, and is a view showing an example of the arrangement location of the blower effect drying device 800. As shown in FIG. Moreover, FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram explaining an example of the ventilation effect drying apparatus 800. As shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 58, the blowing effect drying apparatus 800 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 23 in the lower tray unit 230. That is, the air blowing effect drying device 800 is provided on the left side of the operation handle 24 and the lower speaker 19 b on the right side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the air blowing effect drying device 800 includes an air blowing portion 810 such as a fan and a first air blowing path 820 for guiding the wind from the air blowing portion 810 to the ball emitting device 79 side. 1) The first opening and closing member 821 for opening and closing the air passage 820, the porous wall portion 822 for blocking movement of the game ball but not movement of the air (air), wind from the air blowing portion 810 as the operation handle 24 and the right side A second air passage 830 for guiding to the lower speaker 19 b side and a second opening and closing member 831 for opening and closing the second air passage 830 are configured.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the ball guiding passage 79a for guiding the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21 to the ball launching device 79 is provided with a communication opening communicating with the first air passage 820. There is. The communication opening is an outlet of the first air passage 820. That is, the communication opening is connected to the air outlet 811 of the air blowing unit 810 by the first air passage 820. The communication opening is covered with a porous wall portion 822 provided with a plurality of through holes, so that the wind having passed through the first air passage 820 can enter the ball guide passage 79a, but the ball guide passage 79a The game ball which passes through can not enter into the first air passage 820.
The first opening and closing member 821 opens the first air passage 820, that is, an open state (a state shown in FIG. 59A) which allows the flow of air to the ball guide passage 79a, and closes the first air passage 820, That is, it can be converted to the closed state (state shown in FIG. 59 (b)) in which the circulation of the wind to the ball guiding path 79a is prohibited.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58, in the vicinity of the operation handle 24 and the lower speaker 19b on the right side, an air outlet 830a which is a communication hole communicating the inside (second air passage 830) of the gaming machine 10 with the outside is provided. There is. That is, the air outlet 830 a is an outlet of the second air passage 830. Therefore, since the wind having passed through the second air passage 830 is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10 through the air outlet 830a, the player can feel the wind.
The second opening and closing member 831 opens the second air passage 830, that is, an open state that allows the flow of air to the air outlet 830a (state shown in FIG. 59B), and closes the second air passage 830, that is, It can be converted to the closed state (state shown in FIG. 59A) which prohibits the flow of the air to the air outlet 830a.

The effect control device 300 of this modification is configured to control the state of the air blowing effect drying device 800, specifically, to control the opening and closing operation of the first opening and closing member 821 and the second opening and closing member 831.
The default state of the blowing effect drying apparatus 800 is a blowing drying state functioning as a blowing drying apparatus (that is, a state in which the first opening and closing member 821 is opened and the second opening and closing member 831 is closed. Shown in FIG. State). For example, during the execution of a specific effect, the effect control device 300 changes the air blowing effect drying device 800 from the air blowing drying state to the air blowing effect state (that is, the first opening and closing member 821 is closed and the second opening and closing member 831 is open). The state shown in FIG. 59 (b) is switched to the state shown in FIG. Here, the specific effect is, for example, an effect having a high jackpot expectation (an expected value from which a special result aspect is derived) is high, and specifically, for example, a special 3 reach or a premier reach.

  Alternatively, for example, when the special effects variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 performs a lottery for blowing effect (that is, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the blowing effect), and when the lottery is won, During the execution of the special view variation display game, control may be performed to switch the blowing effect drying device 800 from the blowing dry state to the blowing effect state, and to return to the blowing dry state at a predetermined timing. For example, by setting the winning probability in the case of a big hit to be higher than the winning probability in the case where the result of the special view fluctuation display game is out, the air blowing effect is executed as a presentation with a high probability of big hit. can do.

  Further, the effect control device 300 of the present modification is configured to control ON / OFF of the blower unit 810 according to the current game state or the like. The device that controls the ON / OFF of the blower unit 810 is not limited to the effect control device 300 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the game control device 100 may control the ON / OFF of the blower unit 810.

As described above, the effect control device 300 switches between the air blow drying state and the air blow effect state by opening any one of the first opening and closing member 821 and the second opening and closing member 831 and closing the other. Can.
Therefore, the water adhering to the gaming balls passing through the ball guide path 79a can be forcibly removed by the wind at least in the air-blowing and drying state. In addition, it is possible to perform a blowing effect that sends the wind from the blowing unit 810 that generates the wind for removing the water adhering to the gaming balls toward the hand operating the operation handle 24 of the player.
Furthermore, when switched to the blowing effect state, the ball guide passage 79a side is closed by the first opening and closing member 821, so that it is possible to prevent external moisture from invading the ball guide passage 79a. In addition, when switched to the blowing effect state, the air from the blowing unit 810 is directed to the blowing port 830a, so the moisture accumulated in the second blowing path 830 can be discharged from the blowing port 830a to the outside of the gaming machine 10 At the same time, since the wind which has hit the first opening and closing member 821 is directed to the air outlet 830a side, the moisture accumulated in the upstream portion (the portion between the first opening and closing member 821 and the air blowing portion 810) of the first air passage 820 is blown. It is also possible to discharge from the mouth 830a to the outside of the gaming machine 10. In addition, since the wind is blown out from the air blowing port 830a when switched to the air blowing effect state, it is possible to prevent external moisture from intruding into the gaming machine 10 from the air blowing port 830a.
Furthermore, when the air blowing / drying state is switched, the air blowing port 830a side is closed by the second opening / closing member 831, so that the moisture outside the gaming machine 10 can be prevented from entering the inside of the ball guiding path 79a.

The closed state of the first opening and closing member 821 is not a state in which the second air passage 830 is completely closed, that is, a state in which the flow of air to the air outlet 830a is not prohibited, and the flow of air to the air outlet 830a is restricted. It is good if it is in the state of doing. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the closed state of the first opening and closing member 821 allows the flow of wind to the air outlet 830a, but the amount of the flow is reduced compared to the open state. It may be configured to be By configuring in this manner, it is possible to remove the water adhering to the gaming balls passing through the ball guiding path 79a not only in the air blowing and drying state but also in the air blowing effect state.
Further, the opening and closing member may be the second opening and closing member 831 alone. That is, the first opening and closing member 821 may not be provided. Also when configured in this way, it is possible to remove the water adhering to the gaming balls passing through the ball guiding path 79a in both of the air blowing and drying state and the air blowing and rendering state.

In addition, the first opening / closing member 821 and the second opening / closing member 831 are not provided, and the blower unit 810 is in the first state facing the first air passage 820 and the second state facing the second air passage 830. It may be configured to be convertible.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 61A, in the air-drying state, the air outlet 810 is in the first state in which the air outlet 811 faces the first air passage 820 side. Then, when the air blowing and drying state is shifted to the air blowing and producing state, the air blowing portion 810 is rotated about the pivot shaft 810a, and as shown in, for example, FIG. It may be configured to convert to the second state facing the road 830 side.

In addition, an operation switch operable by the player is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the gaming machine 10 (for example, in the vicinity of the air outlet 830a), and when the operation switch is pressed in the air blowing dry state, air blowing effect is generated for a predetermined period. It may be configured to shift to the state.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, for example, the first air passage 820 may be shaped so as to pass through the ball emitting device 79 or the vicinity thereof. Thus, the wind passing through the first air passage 820 can be warmed by the heat (exhaust heat from the ball launching device 79) generated inside the ball launching device 79, so the gaming ball passing through the ball guiding passage 79a It is possible to blow hot air (or warm air) to the water, and it is possible to efficiently remove the water adhering to the gaming balls supplied to the ball launching device 79.
Also, instead of the porous wall portion 822, the first air blowing / drying device 800 is replaced by the upper plate dehumidifying portion 620A (see FIG. 52A) or the lower plate dehumidifying portion 620B (see FIG. 52A). It may cover the exit of the passage 820. Thereby, it becomes possible to blow dry air on the gaming balls passing through the ball guiding path 79a, and the water adhering to the gaming balls supplied to the ball firing device 79 can be efficiently removed.

  The air blowing effect drying apparatus 800 may be provided not in the lower tray unit 230 but in the rear flow passage of the gaming machine 10 as shown in FIG. 63, for example. That is, the air blowing effect drying device 800 is an upstream rear flow passage (a flow passage formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow passage device 74) through which the game ball before being dispensed by the ball dispensing device 75 passes. Function as a blower / dryer for removing water adhering to the gaming balls passing through the downstream back flow path (the flow path formed by the upstream portion forming member 76) through which the gaming balls after being paid out by the ball dispensing device 75 pass. It is also possible to configure so as to have a function as a blast effect device that sends wind from the blower vent 830a provided in the vicinity of the speakers 19a and 19b toward the player. In the example shown in FIG. 63, the air outlet 830a is provided in the vicinity of the upper speaker 19a on the left side, but the air outlet 830a is in the vicinity of the upper speaker 19a on the right side according to the arrangement location of the air blowing effect drying device 800. It may be provided in the vicinity of the lower speaker 19b on the left side.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second modified example of the second embodiment, the ball launcher 79 for launching gaming balls to the gaming area 32, the operation handle 24 for operating the ball launcher 79, and In the gaming machine, the first blowing passage 820 for guiding the wind from the blowing means to the ball guiding path 79a for guiding the gaming ball to the ball emitting device 79, and the gaming machine 10 The second air flow path 830 for guiding the wind from the air blowing means and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game are provided to the air outlet 830a opened toward the outside of the room. The effect control means is provided in the vicinity of the operation handle 24 (see FIG. 58), and from the air blow means from the air blow dry state which preferentially guides the wind from the air blow means to the ball guide path 79a when executing a specific effect. The wind of the wind 830 Switched to blowing effect state preferentially leads to (see FIG. 59 to FIG 62).
Therefore, since the water adhering to the gaming ball passing through the ball guide path 79a can be forcibly removed by the wind at least in the blow and dry state, the rolling speed of the gaming ball can be made uniform. . Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.
In addition, the effect of blowing air from the blowing means (the blowing portion 810) for generating the wind for removing the water adhering to the gaming ball is sent to the hand operating the operation handle 24 of the player. Can also increase the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the second modified example of the second embodiment includes the first opening and closing member 821 for opening and closing the first air passage 820 and the second opening and closing member 831 for opening and closing the second air passage 830. The effect control means (effect control device 300) opens any one of the first opening / closing member 821 and the second opening / closing member 831 and closes the other, so that the air blowing dry state and the air blowing effect state can be obtained. It can be configured to switch (see FIG. 59, FIG. 60, and FIG. 62).
With such a configuration, the air blowing / drying state and the air blowing effect state can be obtained by a simple structure in which any one of the first opening / closing member 821 and the second opening / closing member 831 is opened and only the other is closed. It is possible to switch.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the blower (the blower 810) is converted into a first state facing the first air passage 820 and a second state facing the second air passage 830. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can be configured to switch between the air blowing dry state and the air blowing effect state by converting the air blowing means between the first state and the second state. (See Figure 61).
With such a configuration, it is possible to switch between the air blow drying state and the air blow rendering state by a simple structure that only converts the air blowing means (air blow unit 810) between the first state and the second state. Become.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second modified example of the second embodiment, the first air passage 820 can be configured to be directed to the ball guiding passage 79a via the ball emitting device 79 or the vicinity thereof (FIG. 62). reference).
With this configuration, hot air (or warm air) can be blown to the gaming balls passing through the ball guiding path 79a, so the water adhering to the gaming balls supplied to the ball launching device 79 can be efficiently It becomes possible to remove.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b capable of outputting the game effect sound, the blowing means (the blowing portion 810) and the game ball are guided. The first air flow path 820 for guiding the wind from the air blowing means to the ball flow path (the ball guide path 79a (in the case of FIG. 58) or the back flow path (in the case of FIG. 63) The second air flow path 830 for guiding the wind from the air blowing means to the open air blowing port 830a, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, the air blowing port 830a is a speaker (right side The presentation control means is provided in the vicinity of the lower speaker 19b (in the case of FIG. 58) and the upper left speaker 19a (in the case of FIG. 63). Guide wind from the wind to the ball flow path preferentially From the wind dry state, it may be configured to switch to the blowing effect state for guiding the wind from the blower unit preferentially to the air blowing port 830a (see FIG. 59 to FIG 62).
Therefore, since the water adhering to the gaming ball passing through the ball flow passage (the ball guiding passage 79a and the back flow passage) can be forcibly removed by the wind, the rolling speed of the gaming ball is made uniform. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.
Furthermore, since it is possible to perform a blast effect to send the wind from the blowing means (the blowing portion 810) for generating the wind for removing the water adhering to the gaming balls toward the player, it is possible to make the game more interesting. It can be enhanced.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, a duct 450 as a drying means for removing the water adhering to the gaming balls is disposed on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 64 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 according to the present modification, and is a view showing an example of an arrangement location of the duct 450. As shown in FIG. FIG. 65A is a schematic view for explaining an example of the duct 450. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 64, the effect control device 300 is connected with a cooling fan 45 for cooling various places of the game machine 10. The cooling fan 45 of this modification is configured to absorb the heat inside the gaming machine 10 and blow it out of the gaming machine 10. The suction port 45a of the cooling fan 45 faces the front side (inner side) and the blowout port 45b is rear It is arranged to face the side (outside).
For example, as shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 (a), on the back side of the gaming machine 10, the hot air (or warm air) blown out from the outlet 45b of the cooling FAN 45 And a duct 450 for guiding. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is configured to remove the moisture attached to the gaming balls using exhaust heat from various places of the gaming machine 10.
Although the duct 450 for guiding the wind from the cooling fan 45 to the inside of the chute 73 is provided in the examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 (a), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a duct 450 may be provided for guiding the wind from the cooling FAN 45 to the inside of the storage tank 72, or the duct for guiding the wind from the cooling FAN 45 to the inside of the bent flow path device 74. A duct 450 may be provided to guide the wind from the cooling fan 45 to the inside of the upstream portion forming member 76.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the ball payout device 75 that pays out the gaming balls based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the ball payout device 75 is guided. Exhaust heat supply means (duct 450) for supplying exhaust heat to a payout standby channel (a channel formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending channel device 74) on which the gaming ball stands by is provided.
Therefore, since the water adhering to the gaming ball passing through the payout standby flow path can be forcibly removed by heat, the rolling speed of the gaming ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment is provided with a cooling fan (cooling FAN 45) for forcibly discharging the heat inside the gaming machine 10 to the outside, and the exhaust heat supply means (duct 450) Can be configured to supply the heat discharged by the cooling fan to the discharge standby flow path (the flow path formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow path device 74).
With this configuration, hot air (or warm air) can be blown to the gaming balls passing through the discharge standby flow path, so the water adhering to the gaming balls supplied to the ball dispensing device 75 can be efficiently It can be removed well.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, a swinging member 48 as a drying means for removing the water adhering to the gaming balls is disposed in the gaming area 32.

FIG. 66 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the present modification and is a view showing an example of the arrangement portion of the swinging member 48. As shown in FIG. FIG. 67 is a view for explaining an example of the swinging member 48, where (a) is a front view of the swinging member 48, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the swinging member 48. As shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the swinging member 48 faces the first place 32a of the right play area of the play area 32, that is, the place where the gaming ball fired to the right play area first collides It is arranged in the place where Therefore, the game ball fired to the right play area of the play area 32 first collides with the first portion 32 a and then collides with the swing member 48.

Although the swinging member 48 can be disposed at the first portion 32a, ie, the portion where the gaming ball launched to the game area 32 first collides, the consumption of the swinging member 48 is suppressed. It is preferable that the swinging member 48 be disposed at a place other than the first place 32a from the viewpoint of, for example. Furthermore, although it is possible to dispose the swinging member 48 at a place other than the place facing the first place 32a, the swing frequency of the swinging member 48 is increased to improve the moisture removal effect of the swinging member 48 ( From the viewpoint of enhancing the dehumidification effect, etc., it is preferable that the swinging member 48 be disposed at a location facing the first location 32a.
The swinging member 48 can also be disposed in the left play area of the play area 32. Also in this case, it is preferable to dispose the rocking member 48 at a place other than the place where the game ball fired to the left side game area of the game area 32 first collides, at the place opposite to the place where the first collision occurs. It is more preferable to arrange.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), the swinging member 48 includes a rectangular parallelepiped case body 48a and a plurality of granular desiccants 48b accommodated in the case body 48a. Ru.
A plurality of through holes communicating the inside and the outside of the case body 48a are provided in the case body 48a. The granular desiccant 48b is a granular moisture absorbent such as silica gel, and the shape and size of the through holes of the case body 48a are set to a shape and size which the granular desiccant 48b or gaming balls can not fit in or pass through. ing. In FIG. 67 (b), although the through holes are not provided in the rear surface portion of the case body 48a, a plurality of through holes may be provided in the rear surface portion of the case body 48a. Further, the plurality of through holes provided in the case body 48a may be formed in at least one of the six faces of the case body 48a.

The case body 48a is, for example, attached to the game board 30 so as to be pivotable about a pivot shaft 48a1. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the game ball collides, the swinging member 48 pivots (swings) about the pivot shaft 48a1.
Further, the case body 48a contains a granular desiccant 48b in an amount smaller than the maximum volume of the case body 48a. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the swinging member 48 and the swinging member 48 rotates (swings), the granular desiccant 48b is stirred in the case body 48a, so that the collision occurs to the swinging member 48. The water adhering to the game balls can be efficiently removed, and the moisture in the game area 32 can be efficiently removed by the swing member 48.

It should be noted that the swinging member 48 of this modification is substantially parallel to the first portion 32a in the normal state, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, from the viewpoint of smoothing the flow of the gaming ball in the right gaming area, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rocking member 48 may not be substantially parallel to the first portion 32a in a normal state.
Further, the swinging member 48 may not be attached to the game board 30 so as to be able to pivot (swing) around the pivot shaft 48a1. That is, the swing member 48 may be attached to the game board 30 so as to swing when the game ball collides, and may be attached to the game board 30 by an elastic member such as a spring, for example.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the fourth modified example of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow down, the gaming ball collides with a predetermined location of the gaming area 32 A swinging member 48 is provided, and the swinging member 48 includes a case body 48a having moisture permeability and a plurality of granular desiccants 48b accommodated in the case body 48a, and the swinging member The plurality of granular desiccants 48b are agitated in the case body 48a by the oscillation of 48.
Therefore, it is possible to remove the water adhering to the gaming ball which has collided with the swinging member 48, and to keep the inside of the gaming area 32 in the low humidity state by the swinging member 48, The motion speed can be made uniform. Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game. Furthermore, since the swinging member 48 swings when the game ball collides, it is possible to provide visual effects.
The case body 48a is not limited to the one provided with a plurality of through holes, and may be appropriately changed as long as it has moisture permeability, and for example, the front surface or the side surface is an opening surface, and the opening The surface may be covered with a moisture-permeable sheet (such as moisture-permeable paper).
In addition, the shape of the swinging member 48 is not limited to a rectangular parallelepiped, and can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the fourth modified example of the second embodiment, the predetermined location (that is, the location where the rocking member 48 is disposed) is the location where the gaming ball fired to the gaming area 32 first collides It can be configured to be other than (for example, the first place 32a).
By configuring in this manner, when the game ball collides with the rocking member 48 as compared to the case where the rocking member 48 is disposed at the place where the game ball fired to the game area 32 first collides Since the impact is weakened, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the rocking member 48 (such as the progress of wear and tear on the granular desiccant 48b).
The drying means provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the swinging member 48 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the drying means may be a member molded of silica gel or the like. As a member molded by silica gel etc., for example, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus (Puden) 37, the opening / closing door 38c of the special fluctuation winning apparatus (large winning opening) 38, the cell drawing used for the starting opening, decoration, etc. And seats, seals, windmills, and part of the effects. Also, the drying means provided in the game area 32 may be disposed at a place where the game balls do not collide.

Fifth Modification
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with an opening / closing member 990 as a drying means for removing water attached to the game ball, instead of the attachment type opening / closing door 38c. Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the special winning combination device 38 is provided with the general winning opening 35, and the general winning opening forming portion 953e forming the general winning opening 35 has moisture attached to the gaming ball. A winning opening forming member 95 as a drying means to be removed is disposed.

The gaming machine 10 of this modification is provided, for example, with a special fluctuation winning device 38 shown in FIG. 68, instead of the special fluctuation winning device 38 shown in FIG. 2 and the general winning opening 35 on the right side.
The configuration of the special variation winning device 38 of this modification will be described. As shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the special variation winning device 38 has a flow path rear wall 962 disposed along the front surface of the game board 30, and a flow path front wall disposed forward of the flow path rear wall 962 Interposed between 952 and 952, the gaming ball is provided with an outflow passage 38f capable of flowing in a row. The flow-down path 38f is inclined to the left as viewed from the front side, and the gaming balls flow downward in a row in a row.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the flow-down passage 38f is constituted by an opening / closing member 990 which can slide in the front-rear direction. The opening and closing member 990 is driven by the big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and protrudes forward as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 (a), and the special variation winning device 38 (big winning opening 38d). The game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball can not win a prize, and an open state in which the game ball can be won in a large prize opening 38d by retreating backward as shown in FIG. 70 (b). It has become. That is, the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f does not flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state and does not flow into the big winning opening 38d, and the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. Is designed to flow into the special winning opening 38d. In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the channel front wall 952 and the gap, but it is a gap to such an extent that the gaming ball can not flow.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the special variation winning device 38 has a front wall member 950 having a flow path front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 having a flow path rear wall 962, and a main body 970 to which an opening / closing member 990 etc. are attached. And a cover member 979 which covers the back surface of the main body portion 970.

  The front wall member 950 includes a plate-like front surface 951. The front surface of the front portion 951 is disposed close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 so that the game ball does not flow forward of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front portion 951 is a surface that can be viewed by the player, and it is a lens that is decorated and can transmit light. An LED (not shown) is arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as a decoration means, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light for decorating the special variation winning device 38 is a color different from the color of light emitted from the batch display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent batch display device 50 from being obscured. Further, an upper portion of the plate-like front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 which forms a side wall on the front side of the flow-down path 38f.

  As shown in FIG. 69, on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952, a plurality of front wall protrusions 954 projecting rearward are provided. The front wall projecting portion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion in which the left and right side surfaces are inclined, and slightly upstream of the projecting portion 992 in front of each of the projecting portions 992 provided in the opening / closing member 990. It is provided to be located in The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing to the left backward, for example, in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 38f as shown in FIG. That is, the gaming balls flowing down the flow-off path 38f form a contact portion that can be contacted. Since the front wall projection 954 is slightly upstream, the gaming ball flowing to the left is guided to the rear by the front wall projection 954 and then to the rear by the projection 992, The game balls are effectively guided.

  As shown in FIG. 72, on the back surface side of the front wall member 950, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like front surface portion 951 are provided. The extension wall 953 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f, a large winning hole formation portion 953b forming a side wall or bottom surface of the large winning opening 38d, A guide channel forming portion 953c forming a guiding channel 955 for guiding a game ball winning in the opening 38d, a switch mounting portion forming portion 953d forming a mounting portion 956 for mounting the large winning opening switch 38a, and a general winning opening 35 It has a function as a surrounding wall 953f for preventing the entry into the inside of the game ball flowing down around the special winning hole formation portion 953e and the special variation winning device 38.

  The bottom portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f is an inclined surface that slopes to the right when viewed from the back surface side. Also, the special winning opening formation portion 953b is inclined so as to collect the gaming balls having flowed into the special winning opening 38d into the guiding channel 955. A game ball can flow in a row into the guiding channel 955, and a winning hole switch 38a is provided in the flowing portion into the guiding channel 955. As a result, all the game balls having flowed into the special winning opening 38d are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a and then flow into the guiding channel 955. The induction flow path 955 formed by the induction flow path formation portion 953 c is a flow path for guiding the gaming ball from the big winning opening 38 d to the back surface side of the gaming board 30, and the back surface of the front surface portion 951 Ribs 957 are formed for guiding to. In addition, the general winning a prize opening formation part 953e forms the general winning a prize opening 35 which is opened to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variation winning device 38. A rib 958 is formed on the back surface of the front portion 951 for guiding the gaming ball having flowed into the general winning opening 35 to the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the rear wall member 960 is provided with a plate-like rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to a front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a part of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 which is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 which forms a rear side wall of the flow-down path 38f. Further, at a position to be a lower end of the flow path rear wall 962, an open / close member insertion portion 963 which penetrates in the back and forth direction for inserting the open / close member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed.

  Further, on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962, a plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 that project forward are provided. As shown in FIG. 69, the rear wall protruding portion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped protruding portion in which the left and right side surfaces are sloped, and is provided at a position adjacent to the recessed portion 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall projection 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the gaming ball flowing downward to the left in order to meander the gaming ball flowing down the flowing path 38 f. That is, the gaming balls flowing down the flow-off path 38f form a contact portion that can be contacted. The back wall projection 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side of the flow-down path 38f at the portion where the recess 993 is not provided, and the game ball It is possible to meander.

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the induction flow channel 955 is in communication with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 in the center portion of the rear surface portion 961 and in the front wall member 950 opposite to the portion where the induction flow channel 955 is formed. A through portion 968 is formed in the front and back. Further, a switch mounting portion 965 which penetrates the front and back so as to be able to accommodate the rear portion of the big winning opening switch 38a is formed above the induction flow channel 955. Further, on the right side portion of the rear face portion 961 and facing the portion where the general winning opening 35 is formed in the front wall member 950, the gaming balls winning in the general winning opening 35 are made to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966 a which is penetrated back and forth is formed so as to communicate the general winning hole flow passage 966 to be guided with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), a plurality of rib-like extending walls 967 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 961 are provided on the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. The extending wall 967 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a guiding channel forming portion 967a forming the guiding channel 955, and a general winning hole channel forming portion 967b forming the general winning hole channel 966, It has a function as a surrounding wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variation winning device 38.

  The guiding channel forming portion 967a forms a guiding channel 955 so as to guide the gaming ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back side downward. In addition, a rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the guide channel 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961. The general winning opening flow passage forming portion 967 b forms a general winning opening flow passage 966 so as to guide the gaming ball guided from the penetrating portion 966 a to the back side downward. Further, a rib 966 b for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear face portion 961.

  The surrounding wall 967 c is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion formed in the portion to which the special variation winning device 38 is attached on the gaming board 30, and when the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the gaming board 30. In this case, the peripheral wall 967c is in a state of being inserted into the through portion. Further, the back surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the surrounding wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board 30 when the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the game board 30. A plurality of bosses for positioning and a plurality of screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69, an opening / closing member unit 980 including an opening / closing member 990 and an operating mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body portion 970. The opening and closing member unit 980 transmits the driving force from the opening and closing member 990 which can slide in the front and rear direction, the special winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening and closing member 990, and the special winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening and closing member 990 And a drive arm 983.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the opening / closing member unit 980 is in a state in which the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed with the opening / closing member 990 projected forward as shown in FIG. 74 (a). The open / close member 990 can be converted to a state in which the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened with the open / close member 990 retracted to the rear. The opening / closing member 990 can appear above the winning opening 38 d through the opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body 970 and the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

The opening and closing member 990 is slidably disposed forward and backward in a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the opening / closing member 990 has a front end portion extending upward of the large winning opening 38d one step lower than the upper surface portion 994 to form a flow path forming portion which forms the bottom of the flow-down path 38f. It is supposed to be 991.
The flow passage forming portion 991 is formed with a plurality of projecting portions 992 projecting upward in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990. The side surface on the upstream side of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side is directed to the downstream side, and it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball flowing down from the right toward the recess 993 to the rear. Further, the downstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side is directed to the upstream side, so that it can be guided in the downstream direction when the game ball flowing out forward from the recess 993 comes in contact.

Further, a recessed portion 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed rearward is formed in the stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 which is one step lower and which is opposed to the projecting portion 992 in the sliding direction. The distance between the side surface of the stepped portion forming the recess 993 and the side surface of the projecting portion 992 is such that the game balls can flow down in a row at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surfaces of the step portion forming the recess 993 is obliquely formed so that the front side is directed to the downstream side, and the gaming ball can smoothly flow out from the recess 993 to the front There is.
That is, on the top surface of the opening and closing member 990, undulations such as the projecting portion 992 and the recess 993 are provided. Such unevenness causes the game ball to stay on the opening and closing member 990 for a long time.

  FIG. 75 shows the flow-down mode of the gaming ball in the special variation winning device 38. The gaming balls flowing down from the right to the left in the flow-down path 38 f are first guided obliquely forward by the rear wall projecting portion 964 located most upstream, and flow into the flow path forming portion 991 in the opening / closing member 990. Then, it is guided obliquely backward by the front wall projection 954 and is guided obliquely backward by the projection 992 of the opening / closing member 990 and flows into the recess 993. The gaming ball having flowed into the recess 993 is again guided diagonally forward by the downstream side surface of the recess 993 formed obliquely toward the downstream side, and the front wall projection 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

  Thereafter, the guidance to the oblique back by the front wall projection 954 and the projection 992 and the guidance to the oblique front by the recess 993 and the back wall projection 964 are repeated, and the gaming ball flowing down the falling path 38f meanders back and forth While it will flow down. As a result, there is no ups and downs of the front wall projecting portion 954, the rear wall projecting portion 964, the projecting portion 992, the recess 993 and the like in the flow-down path 38f, and the time of staying on the opening and closing member 990 is longer than when flowing straight down It will be. For this reason, the gaming ball is always present on the opening and closing member 990, and is present on the opening and closing member 990 when the opening and closing member 990 is opened even if the opening time of the special variation winning device 38 is short. There is a high possibility that a game ball falls and a prize is won in the big winning opening 38d, and even with a short opening, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for a prize. In addition, it is preferable to secure the time required for the gaming ball to stay on the opening and closing member 990 for the interval time in which the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed before the short open round. .

  In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the gaming ball which has been retained on the opening and closing member 990 is guided by coming into contact with the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening and closing member 990 to be away from the big winning opening 38d Be done. In addition, the bouncing game ball may be further separated from the big winning opening 38d by contacting the front wall projecting portion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protruding portion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the projecting portions 992 formed in the opening and closing member 990 are disposed at intervals through which the game balls can pass, they may fall without contacting the projecting portions 992 through the intervals. In addition, special fluctuation winning device 38 opening time when it becomes short opening which it mentions later becomes time which can flow into big winning a prize opening 38d even if it is the game ball which contacts and bounces to projection 992 etc as mentioned above ing. Thus, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the big winning opening 38d.

  By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this manner, the rolling aspect of the game ball when opening the opening / closing member 990 becomes colorful, and the interest of the game can be improved. . In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timings of the plurality of gaming balls existing on the opening and closing member 990 to the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and the ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

  In addition, although the front wall protrusion part 954, the back wall protrusion part 964, the protrusion part 992, and the recessed part 993 were provided in the downflow path 38f as ups and downs, you may be another thing. For example, a groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 as a relief, and the gaming ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. In addition, rib-like protrusions and grooves are provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the flow-down direction as undulations, so that the game balls flow downward while being moved vertically by the protrusions and grooves. You may

For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the opening and closing member 990 includes an opening and closing member main body 990a having a space therein, and a plurality of granular desiccants 990b housed in the opening and closing member main body 990a. .
A slit hole 995 communicating the inside and the outside of the opening and closing member main body 990a is provided at the boundary (that is, the stepped portion) of the upper surface portion 994 of the opening and closing member main body 990a and the flow path forming portion 991. In FIG. 68 to FIG. 75, illustration of the slit hole 995 is omitted. The granular desiccant 990b is a granular moisture absorbent such as silica gel, and the width (that is, the length in the vertical direction) of the slit hole 995 is set to a width at which the granular desiccant 990b or the game ball can not fit or pass through. It is done.

  In the opening and closing member main body 990a, a granular desiccant 990b of an amount smaller than the maximum capacity of the opening and closing member main body 990a is accommodated. Therefore, the granular desiccant 990b is agitated in the opening / closing member main body 990a by the impact when the game ball collides with the opening / closing member 990, or by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 990. The moisture contained in the game area 32 can be efficiently removed by the opening and closing member 990 as well as the moisture can be efficiently removed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), a winning opening forming member 95 is disposed in the general winning opening forming portion 953e forming the general winning opening 35.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (b) and 76 (c), the winning opening forming member 95 has a winning opening forming member main body 95a having a space therein and a plurality of granular drying members housed in the winning opening forming member main body 95a. And an agent 95b.
The upper surface portion of the winning opening formation member main body 95a is provided with a plurality of through holes communicating the inside and the outside of the winning opening formation member main body 95a. The granular desiccant 95b is a granular moisture absorbent such as silica gel, and the shape and size of the through holes of the winning hole formation member main body 95a are such that the granular desiccant 95b or the game ball can not be fitted or passed through. It is set to.

Granular desiccant 95b in an amount smaller than the maximum capacity of the winning opening forming member main body 95a is accommodated in the winning opening forming member main body 95a. Therefore, since the granular desiccant 95b is stirred in the winning hole forming member main body 95a by the impact when the gaming ball collides with the winning hole forming member 95, it adheres to the gaming ball having collided with the winning hole forming member 95. While the existing water can be efficiently removed, the moisture in the game area 32 can be efficiently removed by the winning opening formation member 95.
Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the winning opening formation member 95 is disposed in the vicinity of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Therefore, since the heat generated by the large winning opening solenoid 38b can promote the desorption of the water adsorbed to the granular desiccant 95b, it is possible to prolong the dehumidifying effect of the winning opening forming member 95.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the fifth modified example of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow down, the movable member (opening and closing member) performing predetermined operations in the gaming area 32 990) and a drive source (large winning opening solenoid 38b) for generating a driving force for operating the movable member, and the movable role device (special fluctuation winning device 38) is provided, and the movable role device is configured. The predetermined members (opening / closing member 990, winning opening forming member 95) disposed in the game area 32 among the members are the case body (opening / closing member main body 990a, winning opening forming member main body 95a) having moisture permeability, and the case And a plurality of granular desiccants 990b, 95b housed inside the body.
Therefore, since the inside of the game area 32 can be maintained in a low humidity state by the predetermined members (opening and closing members 990, winning opening formation member 95), the rolling speed of the game balls can be made uniform. Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

The case body (opening / closing member main body 990a, winning opening formation member main body 95a) is not limited to the one provided with the communication hole (slit hole 995, through hole) communicating the inside and the outside of the case body, and is moisture permeable. The upper surface and the side surface may be an opening surface, and the opening surface may be covered with a moisture-permeable sheet (such as moisture-permeable paper).
Further, the predetermined member (i.e., the member containing the granular desiccant) is not limited to the opening / closing member 990 and the winning opening forming member 95, and can be appropriately changed.
In addition, the movable part product device is not limited to a device including a plurality of predetermined members (i.e., a member containing a granular desiccant), and may have one predetermined member. For example, in the case of this modification, only one of the opening / closing member 990 and the winning opening formation member 95 may be a member in which the granular desiccant is incorporated.
Further, the movable role product device is not limited to the special variation winning device 38 and can be appropriately changed, and may be, for example, the normal variation winning device 37 or the board effect device 44. Further, the drive source is not limited to the solenoid, and may be a motor or the like.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the fifth modification of the second embodiment, the predetermined member (in the case of the present modification, the winning opening forming member 95) is a member constituting the movable role device (special variation winning device 38). It can be configured to be a member disposed in the vicinity of the drive source (large winning opening solenoid 38b).
With this configuration, the heat generated by the drive source (the large winning opening solenoid 38b) can promote the desorption of the moisture adsorbed to the granular desiccant 95b, so that the predetermined member (the winning opening formation member 95) It is possible to prolong the dehumidifying effect.
The predetermined member disposed in the vicinity of the drive source is not limited to the immovable member, and may be a movable member. Further, when the movable part product device includes a plurality of movable members, the movable member disposed in the vicinity of the drive source at the initial position among the plurality of movable members is a predetermined member (that is, the particulate desiccant is incorporated) It is preferable to set it as a member.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the fifth modified example of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming area 32 in which gaming balls can flow down, the movable member (opening and closing member) performing predetermined operations in the gaming area 32 990), the movable member includes a moisture permeable case body (opening / closing member main body 990a), and a plurality of granular desiccants 990b housed inside the case body. And consists of
Therefore, since the inside of the game area 32 can be maintained in a low humidity state by the movable member (opening and closing member 990), the rolling speed of the game ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since it is possible to always realize a stable winning rate, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.
Furthermore, a plurality of granular desiccant 990b is built in the movable member (opening and closing member 990), and the granular desiccant 990b is agitated in the case body (opening and closing member main body 990a) by the operation of the movable member. It is possible to efficiently remove the moisture in the game area 32 by the movable member.

The case body (opening / closing member main body 990a) is not limited to the one provided with the communication hole (slit hole 995) for communicating the inside and the outside of the case body, and can be appropriately changed as long as it has moisture permeability. For example, the upper surface or the side surface may be an opening surface, and the opening surface may be covered with a moisture-permeable sheet (water-permeable paper or the like).
Further, the movable role product device is not limited to the special variation winning device 38 and can be appropriately changed, and may be, for example, the normal variation winning device 37 or the board effect device 44. Further, the drive source is not limited to the solenoid, and may be a motor or the like.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the fifth modified example of the second embodiment, the movable balls (opening and closing members 990) can be configured such that the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 can collide.
With such a configuration, when the gaming ball collides with the movable member (opening / closing member 990), it is possible to remove the water attached to the gaming ball. Furthermore, since the granular desiccant 990b is stirred in the case body (the opening and closing member main body 990a) by the impact when the game ball collides with the movable member, the water adhering to the game ball collided with the movable member is efficiently While being removable, the movable member can efficiently remove moisture in the play area 32.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the embodiments and the modifications described above can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 19a on the speaker (speaker)
19b Lower speaker (speaker)
21 upper plate 23 lower plate 24 operation handle 32 game area 38 special fluctuation winning combination device (movable combination device)
38b Winning mouth solenoid (drive source)
45 Cooling fan (cooling fan)
48 rocking member 48a case body 48b granular desiccant 75 ball discharging device 79 ball launching device 79a ball guiding path 95 winning opening forming member 95a winning opening forming member main body 95b granular desiccant 300 effect control device (rendering control means)
210 Upper tray unit 211 upper hole (air outlet)
212 pilot hole 450 duct (exhaust heat supply means)
610 Air blower (air blower)
611 outlet 612 suction port 620A upper plate side dehumidifying part (dehumidifying means, upper plate dehumidifying means)
620B Lower dish side dehumidifying part (dehumidifying means, lower dish side dehumidifying means)
621 dehumidifying sheet 710 heating unit (heating means)
720 Temperature adjustment unit (adjustment means)
730 heat conductive metal plate (heat transfer means)
740 back flow path wall 810 air blower (air blower)
820 1st ventilation passage 821 1st opening and closing member 830 2nd ventilation passage 830a air outlet 831 2nd opening and closing member 990 opening and closing member (movable member, predetermined member)
990a opening and closing member main body 990b granular desiccant

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine provided with a ball payout device for paying out gaming balls based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising exhaust heat supply means for supplying exhaust heat to a payout standby flow path in which gaming balls guided to the ball payout device stand by. A cooling fan for forcibly discharging the heat inside the gaming machine to the outside;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the exhaust heat supply unit supplies the heat discharged by the cooling fan to the payout standby flow path.

Images